JP6853723B2 - Game equipment - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming device corresponding to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine.

In the game hall where the game machine is installed, various game devices are connected to the game machine. In such a game device, various controls are performed based on the information transmitted from the game machine. As one of such game devices, a game information display device (both a data display device and a display device for each machine) that can display statistical information such as game results and information indicating the game state of the game machine. There is). The player can select a game machine to play a game by using various information displayed on such a game information display device as clues.

In recent years, it is output from a game machine in a game information display device connected to a game machine capable of operating a state (ART) advantageous to the player, in which a procedure of a stop operation advantageous to the player (stop operation order) is notified. When a predetermined signal (ART signal) indicating the advantageous state is on, an effect display indicating the advantageous state is displayed, and when the predetermined signal is off, the effect is displayed. It has been proposed that the effect display can be terminated (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2015-96100

By the way, like the above-mentioned game machine, it is good if the start and end of the state advantageous to the player can be recognized on the game device side, but when they are not recognizable on the game device side, Ingenuity is required to display the effect linked to the start and end of the advantageous state. In particular, regarding the end of the advantageous state, there are many game machines whose specifications are not recognizable on the game device side, and even when connected to a game machine having such specifications, there is a discrepancy in the displayed contents. It is considered necessary to prevent the occurrence of the above as much as possible.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and even if the gaming device cannot clearly recognize the end of a state advantageous to the player in the gaming machine, the display content is thereby displayed. To provide a game device that can prevent inconsistencies as much as possible and that the game hall can accurately recognize the possibility of a defect or fraudulent activity. The purpose.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming device according to the present invention
When a predetermined start condition (for example, an advantageous section start condition) is satisfied, an advantageous section advantageous to the player is started, and when a predetermined end condition (for example, an advantageous section end condition) is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated and the gaming state is established. Has a normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) and a special gaming state (for example, a BB gaming state), and in the advantageous section, the gaming state is either the normal gaming state or the special gaming state. Regardless of the above, it is a game device (for example, a game display device 1) that can be connected to a game machine (for example, a pachislot game machine 2b) that continues the advantageous section until the predetermined end condition is satisfied. hand,
Information display means for displaying various information (for example, screen units 11A to 11F) and
A display control means (for example, a control unit 100) that controls the information display means, and
An advantageous section start determination means (for example, display CPU 101) that determines whether or not the advantageous section has been started in the game machine according to the operation of the game machine.
An advantageous section end determination means (for example, display CPU 101) that determines whether or not the advantageous section has been completed in the game machine according to the operation of the game machine.
A special game state determination means (for example, display CPU 101) that determines whether or not the game machine is in the special game state according to the operation of the game machine.
When the advantageous section start determining means determines that the advantageous section has started in the gaming machine, the special section is until the advantageous section ending determining means determines that the advantageous section has ended in the gaming machine. Regardless of whether or not the game machine is determined to be in the special gaming state by the game state determining means, the game in the advantageous section that counts the number of games in the advantageous section according to the operation of the game machine. A number counting means (for example, an advantageous section counter) is provided.
In the display control means, the counting result by the game number counting means in the advantageous section corresponds to the predetermined end condition without the game machine determining that the advantageous section has been completed by the advantageous section end determining means. When the specific number of games (for example, the advantageous section counter is "1550") is reached, special information (for example, an error display) is displayed on the information display means.

The gaming device according to the present invention is special when the counting result of the number of games in the advantageous section becomes a specific number of games without determining that the advantageous state (advantageous section) for the player has been completed. Information is displayed. Therefore, even if the gaming device cannot clearly recognize the end of the advantageous section in the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the display contents from being inconsistent as much as possible, and further, a defect. It is also possible for the amusement park to accurately recognize the possibility of the occurrence or fraudulent activity.

Further, the gaming device according to the present invention is
The gaming machine has a low probability of winning a predetermined combination (for example, a replay combination) in which a re-game is activated as the normal game state, and a high probability of winning the first normal game state (for example, a low RT gaming state) and the predetermined combination. It has a second normal gaming state (for example, a high RT gaming state), and in the advantageous section, at least the procedure of the stop operation in which the second normal gaming state is maintained is notified, and the predetermined start condition is satisfied. If this is the case, a first signal (for example, an advantageous section signal) is output to the game device, and when the unit game is completed and the game medium is paid out, a second signal (for example, a second signal corresponding to the number of paid out game media) is output. , Medal payout signal) is output to the game device.
When the first signal is input from the gaming machine, the advantageous section start determining means determines that the advantageous section has started in the gaming machine.
When the number of payouts of the game medium in a predetermined period falls below a predetermined threshold value based on the second signal input from the game machine, the advantageous section end determination means is said to be said in the game machine. It is characterized in that it is determined that the advantageous section has been completed.

Further, in the gaming device according to the present invention, various determinations are made according to various signals input from the gaming machine, so that the state of the gaming machine can be recognized more appropriately.

According to the present invention, even if the gaming device cannot clearly recognize the end of a state advantageous to the player in the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the display contents from being inconsistent as much as possible. Further, it is possible to provide a game device capable of accurately recognizing the possibility that a defect has occurred or a fraudulent act has been performed on the game hall side.

The schematic diagram which shows the game system including the display device for a game which concerns on 1st Embodiment. The whole perspective view of the display device for games which concerns on 1st Embodiment. An exploded perspective view of the game display device according to the first embodiment. The perspective view which shows the screen unit of the game display device which concerns on 1st Embodiment from the back side. The perspective view which shows the plurality of replaceable screen units in the game display device which concerns on 1st Embodiment. The perspective view which shows the display area of the plurality of screen units shown in FIG. The schematic diagram which illustrates the display content of the game display device which concerns on 1st Embodiment. The explanatory view for demonstrating the display principle of the game display device which concerns on 1st Embodiment. The explanatory view for demonstrating the difference of the display form of the game display device which concerns on 1st Embodiment. The explanatory view for demonstrating the 1st display example of the game display device which concerns on 1st Embodiment. The explanatory view for demonstrating the 2nd display example of the game display device which concerns on 1st Embodiment. The explanatory view for demonstrating the 3rd display example of the game display device which concerns on 1st Embodiment. The rear perspective view of the screen unit of the game display device which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. An exploded perspective view of the game display device according to the third embodiment. The operation explanatory view of the movable decorative sheet of the display device for a game which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. The explanatory view for demonstrating the difference in brightness due to the positional relationship between the movable decorative sheet and the fixed decorative sheet of the game display device which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. An exploded perspective view of the game display device according to the fourth embodiment. An overall perspective view of a game machine to which the game display device according to the fourth embodiment is applied (No. 1). FIG. 2 is an overall perspective view of a game machine to which the game display device according to the fourth embodiment is applied. The whole perspective view of the display device for games which concerns on 5th Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of a game display device according to a fifth embodiment. The whole perspective view of the game display device which concerns on modification 1 of 5th Embodiment. The whole perspective view of the game display device which concerns on modification 2 of 5th Embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the game display device according to the sixth embodiment, and (b) is an enlarged view of a main part thereof. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of a game display device according to a first modification of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of a game display device according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of a game display device according to a seventh embodiment. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of a game display device according to a first modification of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of a game display device according to a second modification of the seventh embodiment. The perspective view of the game apparatus which concerns on 8th Embodiment. An exploded perspective view of the gaming device according to the eighth embodiment. The exploded perspective view which shows the gaming apparatus which concerns on 8th Embodiment from the back side. The exploded perspective view which shows the gaming apparatus which concerns on 8th Embodiment from the back side. The explanatory view which shows an example of the optical path pattern of the light from the LED traveling through the light guide plate which concerns on 8th Embodiment. The explanatory view which shows an example of the optical path pattern of the light from the LED traveling through the light guide plate which concerns on 8th Embodiment. The explanatory view which shows an example of the illumination mode of the light guide plate which concerns on 8th Embodiment. The exploded perspective view which shows the gaming apparatus which concerns on 8th Embodiment from the back side. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a projector housing body included in the gaming device according to the ninth embodiment. An exploded perspective view of a projector housing body included in the gaming device according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a projector housing according to a ninth embodiment. The flowchart of the control process executed by the control circuit which concerns on 9th Embodiment. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the configuration of a game machine to which a game display device (game device) according to the first to ninth embodiments is connected. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the configuration of a game machine to which a game display device (game device) according to the first to ninth embodiments is connected. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the configuration of a game machine to which a game display device (game device) according to the first to ninth embodiments is connected. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the configuration of a game machine to which a game display device (game device) according to the first to ninth embodiments is connected. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the configuration of a game machine to which a game display device (game device) according to the first to ninth embodiments is connected. The explanatory view which shows the 1st specification example of the game machine to which the game display device (game device) which concerns on 1st to 9th Embodiment is connected. The explanatory view which shows the 1st specification example of the game machine to which the game display device (game device) which concerns on 1st to 9th Embodiment is connected. The explanatory view which shows the 1st specification example of the game machine to which the game display device (game device) which concerns on 1st to 9th Embodiment is connected. The explanatory view which shows the 2nd specification example of the game machine to which the game display device (game device) which concerns on 1st to 9th Embodiment is connected. The explanatory view which shows the 2nd specification example of the game machine to which the game display device (game device) which concerns on 1st to 9th Embodiment is connected. The explanatory view which shows the 2nd specification example of the game machine to which the game display device (game device) which concerns on 1st to 9th Embodiment is connected. The figure which shows an example of the flowchart of the control process of the game display device (game device) which concerns on 1st to 9th Embodiment when the game machine which concerns on 1st specification example is connected. The figure which shows an example of the flowchart of the control process of the game display device (game device) which concerns on 1st to 9th Embodiment when the game machine which concerns on 1st specification example is connected. The figure which shows an example of the timing chart of each control process when the game display device (game device) which concerns on 1st to 9th Embodiment and the game machine which concerns on 1st specification example are connected. The figure which shows an example of the timing chart of each control process when the game display device (game device) which concerns on 1st to 9th Embodiment and the game machine which concerns on 1st specification example are connected. Explanatory drawing which shows the basic display screen of the game display device (game device) which concerns on 1st to 9th Embodiment when the game machine of 1st specification example is connected. An explanatory view showing a history display screen of the game display device (game device) according to the first to ninth embodiments when the game machine of the first specification example is connected. An explanatory view showing a history display screen of the game display device (game device) according to the first to ninth embodiments when the game machine of the first specification example is connected. It is a figure which shows an example of the flowchart of the control process of the game display device (game device) which concerns on 1st to 9th Embodiment when the game machine which concerns on 2nd specification example is connected. It is a figure which shows an example of the flowchart of the control process of the game display device (game device) which concerns on 1st to 9th Embodiment when the game machine which concerns on 2nd specification example is connected. The figure which shows an example of the timing chart of each control process when the game display device (game device) which concerns on 1st to 9th Embodiment and the game machine which concerns on 2nd specification example are connected. The figure which shows an example of the timing chart of each control process when the game display device (game device) which concerns on 1st to 9th Embodiment and the game machine which concerns on 2nd specification example are connected. The figure which shows an example of the timing chart of each control process when the game display device (game device) which concerns on 1st to 9th Embodiment and the game machine which concerns on 2nd specification example are connected.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

<First Embodiment>
First, a basic outline of the game system including the game display device 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, the game system according to the present embodiment is constructed in a game field such as a so-called pachinko parlor, and has a game display device 1, a game machine 2, a game medium rental device 3, and a server. It is configured to have a device 4, and each of them is connected as shown in the figure.

In the present embodiment, a card is used as an example of the "storage medium", but the present embodiment is not limited to this, and the present embodiment includes coins, tokens, etc. on which an IC chip or the like is mounted. It shall include everything applicable to the invention.

Further, in the present embodiment, the description uses banknotes as an example of "money", but the present invention is not limited to this, and all items such as banknotes, coins, coins, etc. that can be applied to the invention according to the present embodiment. Shall include.

Further, in the present embodiment, when simply described as "card", a membership card lent to a player who has become a member of the game hall, and a counting card (visitor card) temporarily lent by the game hall. Both shall be included.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the term "holding ball" is simply described, both the stored ball stored in association with the membership card and the counting holding ball stored in association with the counting card are included, and simply. When the term "ball holding information" is described, the ball holding information indicating the stored balls (hereinafter referred to as "ball storage information") and the holding ball information indicating the counting holding balls (hereinafter referred to as "counting ball information") are used. ) Are included. Further, the information indicating the amount of money input by the player is referred to as "money information" (or also referred to as "remaining amount information"), and when particularly indicated, "money information" is included in "money information". There may be cases. In addition, the membership card shall be able to store the ball storage information, the counting ball information, and the monetary information separately. Further, for convenience of explanation, the expression "mochidama", which usually indicates information about a game ball owned by the player, is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the player can refer to the "mochidama". Information on medals held, information on game value held by the player by electromagnetic means, and all other similar information shall be included.

[Display device for games]
The game display device 1 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. The detailed configuration of the game display device 1 will be described later.

The game display device 1 of the present embodiment displays various game information as a projected image by a transmissive projector device, and is installed so as to be located above the game machine 2, for example, for each game machine 2. As the game information, the number of acquired game media (number of acquired cards or acquired balls), the number of various games, the game history, and the like are displayed as graphs and numerical values (see FIG. 7). The game display device 1 is provided with a plurality of buttons 14A to 14F, which will be described later, for the player to operate (see FIG. 7). The game display device 1 is connected to the game machine 2, the game medium lending device 3, and the server device 4, and displays various game information based on the input signal and the received signal, or based on the operation of the player. It is displayed on the screens (projected portions) 110A to 110F described later. The game display device 1 may be installed in units of so-called game islands.

The game display device 1 includes a projector main body 12 described later, a control unit for controlling the projector main body 12 (for example, a control unit 100 described later), and the like as electrical or optical components. The control unit controls the projector main body 12 and controls communication between the game machine 2, the game medium lending device 3, and the server device 4. Further, when the operation of the buttons 14A to 14F is detected by the sensor, the control unit controls the display on the screens 110A to 110F according to the operation. In the present embodiment, the physical buttons 14A to 14F are provided. For example, the screens 110A to 110F may be configured by a touch panel, and the control unit may detect an operation on the touch panel.

Although not particularly shown, the game display device 1 includes an interface unit for communicating with the game machine 2, the game medium lending device 3, and the server device 4. The interface unit and the external connection terminal plate described later in the game machine 2 are connected by a contact input method, and communication from the game machine 2 to the game display device 1 is possible in one direction. The interface unit and the game medium lending device 3 are connected by, for example, a harness in a contact input / output system, and bidirectional communication is possible. Further, the interface unit and the server device 4 are connected by a wired LAN method by, for example, a coaxial cable, and are connected by a contact output method by a harness, so that bidirectional communication is possible. The connection method is not limited to these methods. For example, a wireless LAN method may be used for each connection, or an optical communication method using an optical cable may be used. Further, a combination of these methods may be used.

[Game machine]
The game machine 2 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. As the gaming machine 2, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 2a or a pachislot gaming machine 2b is applied. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the pachinko gaming machine 2a and the pachislot gaming machine 2b are collectively referred to as the gaming machine 2.

The pachinko game machine 2a is a game in which a game ball (game medium) is ejected on the board surface, and when a game ball that hits a nail and flows down irregularly enters a specific winning opening, the prize ball is paid out or points are added. Is mainly performed. The pachinko gaming machine 2a has a main control unit for controlling a main gaming device, a sub-control unit for controlling an effect operation related to display, voice output, etc., and a payout control for controlling a payout operation of a game ball as a prize ball. Equipped with a unit, etc. The payout control unit is connected to the game display device 1 via an external connection terminal plate, and plays a game information signal, an error signal, or the like for each game or when the internal state changes. Output to the display device 1. Further, this payout control unit is connected to the game ball lending device 3a via an external connection terminal plate, and outputs a lending request signal and a return request signal based on the operation of the player.

The pachislot game machine 2b rotates a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are drawn by inserting a coin (game medium) and operating a start lever, and presses a stop button corresponding to each reel to release the reels. By sequentially stopping, when the symbols corresponding to the predetermined combination are aligned on the effective line, the game such as paying out coins is mainly performed. Similar to the pachinko gaming machine 2a, the pachislot gaming machine 2b also controls the main control unit for controlling the main gaming device, the sub control unit for controlling the production operation related to the display and voice output, and the coin payout operation. It is equipped with a payout control unit and the like. The payout control unit is connected to the game display device 1 via an external connection terminal plate, and plays a game information signal, an error signal, or the like for each game or when the internal state changes. Output to the display device 1. Further, this payout control unit is connected to the medal lending device 3b via an external connection terminal plate, and outputs a lending request signal and a return request signal based on the operation of the player.

[Game media rental device]
The game medium lending device 3 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. The game medium lending device 3 includes a game ball lending device 3a installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 2a and a medal lending device 3b installed adjacent to the pachislot gaming machine 2b. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the game ball lending device 3a and the medal lending device 3b are collectively referred to as the game medium lending device 3.

The game medium lending device 3 is connected to the server device 4 via, for example, a switching hub or a controller (not shown). When the card is inserted by the player, the game medium lending device 3 uses identification information such as a card ID and a member ID added to the IC chip or the like of the card (hereinafter, simply referred to as "identification information") as a server device. Send to 4. The server device 4 transmits the player's ball information stored in association with the received identification information to the game medium lending device 3. Then, when there is a payout instruction from the player, the server device 4 updates the possession ball information, and the game medium lending device 3 drives a payout device (not shown) to execute the payout control of the game medium. Further, when a bill is inserted by the player, the balance information corresponding to the amount (inserted amount) of the bill is transmitted to the server device 4. Then, when there is a payout instruction from the player, the server device 4 updates the balance information, and the game medium lending device 3 similarly executes the payout control of the game medium.

Further, when the game medium lending device 3 is inserted into a counting device (not shown) by the operation of the player or directly from the game machine 2, the number of the inserted game media is counted and the counting result is calculated. It is transmitted to the server device 4 as the player's counting ball information, and the server device 4 stores the received counting ball information in association with the identification information added to the card. When the card is not inserted, the counting ball information received in association with the identification information previously added to the counting card stored in the game medium lending device 3 is stored.

In the present embodiment, the server device 4 manages the player's ball possession information and the balance information, but the game medium lending device 3 may manage such information. Further, not only the identification information may be added to the card, but also a storage area may be provided, the information may be stored in the storage area, and the information may be managed. Then, the server device 4 may update the information, or the game media lending device 3 may update the information. Further, the ball holding information may be managed by the game medium lending device 3 or the server device 4, and the remaining amount information may be directly stored in the storage area of the card.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the card is not inserted, the counting ball information and the remaining amount information are associated with the identification information previously added to the counting card stored in the game medium lending device 3. Although it is stored, when there is a request to return the card, the game medium lending device 3 or the server device 4 newly adds the identification information to the counting card stored in the game medium lending device 3. The newly added identification information and the counting ball information or the remaining amount information may be stored in association with each other.

Further, when the game machine 2 is provided with a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate (hereinafter, referred to as “rental terminal plate”), the game medium rental device 3 is also connected to the rental terminal plate. Based on the receipt of the lending request signal, the return request signal, and the like output from the lending terminal board, the payout request signal is transmitted to the game machine 2 and the card is returned.

The game medium lending device 3 is also connected to the game display device 1 via a converter or the like, and receives a game information signal, an error signal, or the like output from an external connection terminal board provided on the game machine 2. At the same time, the player's ball information is transmitted to the game display device 1.

[Server device]
The server device 4 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. The server device 4 is used as a so-called hall computer, and is connected to the game display device 1 and also to the game medium lending device 3. The server device 4 uses the game result management information to be managed (for example, ball ejection history information including the past several days, fraud detection information, etc.) and information about the game hall (for example, new machine information, vacant machine information, etc.) for the game. It is transmitted to the display device 1.

The server device 4 is also connected to an external management device (not shown) managed by a center operator, which is a third party other than the amusement park, and can store card identification information, member information, and player's ball information. It is transmitted regularly (for example, once a day). The external management device backs up each transmitted information. When the connection with the external management device is interrupted for a predetermined number of days (for example, 15 days), the server device 4 stops updating the player's ball information.

In the game system as described above, when the player enters the game field (game field), he / she first sits in the desired game machine 2 while looking at various information displayed on the game display device 1. Next, if the player is a member of the game hall, the membership card is inserted into the game medium lending device 3, and after identity verification (for example, input of a registered PIN), the server device 4 If the ball information is stored in, the ball is used, and if the ball information is not stored or the ball information is the number of balls that cannot be rented by the game machine 2, the bill is used. Is thrown in, a loan request is made, the game medium is lent out, and the game is started by throwing the game medium into the game machine 2. Alternatively, if the player is not a member of the game hall, the game is started by inserting banknotes, making a loan request, receiving the loan of the game medium, and inserting the game medium into the game machine 2. At this time, the ball holding information and the remaining amount information stored in the server device 4 are updated (subtracted) by the amount lent.

Then, when the game is continued without being able to receive the payout of the game medium from the game machine 2, the ball holding information and the remaining amount information stored in the server device 4 are stored every time a loan request is made. , It will be updated (subtracted) sequentially by the amount lent out. On the other hand, when the game medium can be paid out from the game machine 2, when the paid out game medium is thrown into the game medium lending device 3, the number of the thrown game media is counted and the counting result is obtained. Based on this, the ball information stored in the server device 4 is updated (added).

After that, when the game on the game machine 2 is finished, the player requests the return of the card. Here, when the membership card is inserted in the game medium lending device 3, the membership card is returned as it is after identity verification (for example, input of a registered password). If the membership card is not inserted in the game medium lending device 3, the counting ball information is stored in the server device 4, or if there is balance information, the membership card is stored in the game medium lending device 3. Return (issue) the counting card. If the counting card information is not stored in the server device 4 and there is no remaining amount of the input amount, the counting card is not returned (issued).

If the counting card is returned (issued) and you want to play a game on another game machine 2, the counting card is attached to the game medium lending device 3 provided corresponding to the other game machine 2. By inserting, the game can be started (replayed) in the same procedure as the membership card (excluding identity verification). In the above case, the replay based on the ball storage information is referred to as "ball storage replay", and the replay based on the counting holding ball information is referred to as "ball holding replay".

[Configuration of game display device]
Next, the configuration of the game display device 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 7.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game display device 1 includes a housing 10, a screen unit 11A, a projector main body (projection means) 12, a reflector 13, and an operation unit 14 as basic components. The housing 10 houses a projector main body 12, a reflector 13, an operation unit 14, and a control unit (not shown) for controlling the operation of the entire game display device 1. The screen unit 11A is attached so as to cover the opening surface 10A provided on the front surface side of the housing 10. In the first embodiment, as shown as an example in FIGS. 5A to 5C, three types of replaceable screen units 11A to 11C are prepared. 2 to 4 show a standard type screen unit 11A, and unless otherwise specified, the screen unit 11A will be described basically using the screen unit 11A, but any screen unit may be used.

As shown in FIG. 3, the housing 10 is formed in a rectangular box shape so as to have a bottom surface 10a, side surfaces 10b and 10c on both left and right sides, a back surface 10d, an upper surface 10e, and an opening surface 10A on the front surface side. The projector main body 12 is installed at the rear portion of the bottom surface 10a, and the operation unit 14 is installed at the front portion of the bottom surface 10a. A reflector 13 is installed on the upper part of the back surface 10d.

The screen unit 11A is formed so as to have a front portion 11a that covers the opening surface 10A of the housing 10 and side portions 11b, 11c on both left and right sides that are detachably fixed to the side surfaces 10b, 10c of the housing 10. There is. The screen unit 11A has a screen (projected portion) 110A provided in the opening 11aa of the front portion 11a, and LED substrates 111 provided on both left and right sides on the rear surface of the front portion 11a as shown in FIG.

In the front portion 11a, in addition to the opening 11aa for arranging the screen 110A, the light emitting surface 111a that emits light on the left and right sides of the screen 110A, and the opening 112 for exposing the buttons 14A to 14F of the operation unit 14 to the front. And are provided.

The screen 110A is a transmissive type that is displayed by projecting a projected image from the rear. For example, the screen 110A is formed of a transparent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film as a main material, and is milky white when not projected. , Translucent, or grayish. The screen 110A of the screen unit 11A is formed so as to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface. Such a screen 110A is a projected image by transmitting the uniformly flat incident surface 1100 (FIG. 4) on the back surface side on which the light projected from the projector main body 12 is incident and the light incident on the incident surface 1100. Has a display surface 1101 (FIG. 3) on the front side on which the light is projected. The screens 110B and 110C of the other screen units 11B and 11C are formed so that the incident surface 1100 is the same as the screen 110A of the screen unit 11A, but the display surface 1101 is different, which will be described later. ..

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the light emitting surface 111a is formed of a translucent plate-shaped member, and the LED substrate 111 is provided on the back surface side thereof. Although not particularly shown, the LED board 111 is equipped with a plurality of LEDs, and is connected to the control unit on the housing 10 side via the connector 111A and the cable 111B. Note that FIG. 4 shows a connector 111A and a cable 111B corresponding to one LED board 111, but the other LED board 111 is also provided with a connector and a cable, and the other LED board 111 is also a connector. And connected to the control unit via a cable.

By this control unit, a plurality of LEDs on the LED substrate 111 are turned on or blinked, and the light of these LEDs is emitted forward through the light emitting surface 111a. The other screen units 11B and 11C are not provided with a light emitting unit, which will be described later.

The light emitting surface 111a is composed of a plate-shaped member having translucency, but is not limited to this, and is composed of at least a part having translucency and not partially translucent. You may do so.

Further, in the translucent portion, a decorative sheet may be arranged between the LED substrate and the plate-shaped member, or the plate-shaped member itself may be decorated with a color having translucency. .. In such a case, the LED substrate functions as a light emitting means having a light source, while the plate-shaped member functions as a decorative member decorated by the light emitting means, and the decorative member optically transmits and diffuses light. Those having characteristics such as polarization, refraction, and reflection are applied.

The projector main body 12 projects light for displaying information about the game as a projected image on the screen. For example, a liquid crystal type projector using a liquid crystal panel or a DLP (Digital Micromirror Device) element using a DMD (Digital Micromirror Device) element. Registered trademark: Digital Light Processing) method is applied.

The projector main body (projection means) 12 is connected to a control unit (not shown), and the operation is controlled by this control unit. The projector main body 12 includes a liquid crystal panel or a DMD element, an LED or a lamp as a light source, a dichroic mirror, a projection lens, and the like. The projection lens is adjustable in the optical axis direction.

Such a projector main body 12 is arranged so that the light emitted from the projection lens directly directs to the reflector 13. When the screen units 11A to 11C are attached, the focus can be adjusted by finely adjusting the projection lens of the projector main body 12 in the optical axis direction. As a result, a clear projected image that is accurately focused can be projected on any of the screens 110A to 110C of the screen units 11A to 11C.

The reflector 13 is composed of a member that reflects light, and the light incident from the projector main body 12 is reflected toward the opening surface 10A of the housing 10 (incident surface 1100 of the screen 110A). It is installed on the back surface 10d in an inclined posture with respect to 10A.

The operation unit 14 has a plurality of buttons 14A to 14F that can be operated by a player or the like side by side. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, the operation unit 14 is provided with a switching button 14A, a history button 14B, a call button 14C, a setting button 14D, a confirmation button 14E, and a cross button 14F in this order from the left side. There is. The operation unit 14 is connected to a control unit (not shown), and when the operation of each of the buttons 14A to 14F is detected by a switch (not shown), a detection signal is supplied from the switch to the control unit, and the control unit becomes a detection signal. Display control is performed accordingly.

The switching button 14A is a button for switching a graph display, a numerical display, or the like, which will be described later. The history button 14B is a button for displaying today's game history. The call button 14C is a button for calling a clerk at the amusement park. The setting button 14D is a button for changing the display setting and the like. The confirmation button 14E is a button for confirming various settings. The cross-shaped button 14F is a button for changing numerical values and scrolling.

5 (A) to 5 (C) show replaceable screen units 11A to 11C, and FIGS. 6 (A) to 6 (C) show display areas on the screens of the screen units 11A to 11C, respectively. The same or similar components in the screen units 11A to 11C are designated by the same reference numerals. Although not particularly shown, the housing 10 is applied to any of the screen units 11A to 11C.

The screen unit 11A shown in FIG. 5 (A) is the same as that shown in FIGS. 2 to 4. The screen unit 11A is configured as a display surface 1101 in which the entire front surface side of the screen 110A is uniformly flat. As shown in FIG. 6A, the projected image V1 is projected on the central portion of the display surface 1101, and the projected image V2 is projected on the left end portion when viewed from the front of the display surface 1101. The projected image V3 is projected on the right end when viewed from the front. As described above, the screen 110A has an incident surface 1100 on the back surface side that is uniformly flat.

As illustrated in FIG. 7, as the projected image V1 on the screen 110A, a chart image showing the number of medals acquired from the start of the game as a line graph is displayed. As the projected image V2, a text image showing the number of bonuses executed today and the cumulative number of games is displayed.

As the projected image V3, a text image showing the number of past bonuses and the cumulative number of games as a history is displayed. The surface on which light is incident is defined as the incident surface 1100, but the surface on which light is projected (display surface) is the back region of the LED substrate 111 or the upper and lower regions of the incident surface 1100 (front portion 11a, etc.). Further, the left and right regions (side portions 11b and 11c) may be included.

Even if the surface on which the light is projected is included inside the screen unit, the projected image may be projected in a region in front of the projector main body 12 or in front of the reflector 13.

The screen unit 11B shown in FIG. 5B is configured as a display surface 1101 (hereinafter, the screen 110B is referred to as a “first display surface 1101”) in which the central portion on the front surface side of the screen 110B is uniformly flat. On the other hand, a second display surface 1101B is formed on the front left and right ends of the screen 110B.

The second display surface 1101B has a step with the first display surface 1101 by being formed so as to have a thickness in front of the first display surface 1101, and is partitioned in a rectangular shape. The screen unit 11B of the present embodiment is not provided with a light emitting surface, and instead, the second display surfaces 1101B on both the left and right sides are arranged up to the regions near both the left and right ends of the screen unit 11B.

As shown in FIG. 6B, the projected image V1 is projected on the first display surface 1101 of the screen 110B, and the projected image V2 is projected on the second display surface 1101B on the left side when the screen 110B is viewed from the front. Then, the projected image V3 is projected on the second display surface 1101B on the right side when the screen 110B is viewed from the front.

The projected images V1 to V3 basically have the same contents as the images shown in FIG. 7, but the projected images V2 include, for example, a message image in addition to the text image on the second display surfaces 1101B on both the left and right sides. , V3 can be displayed. This will be described later.

Although not particularly shown, the screen 110B also has an incident surface on which the light projected from the projector main body 12 is incident on the back side corresponding to the first display surface 1101 and the second display surface 1101B. The incident surface of such a screen 110B is also a uniformly flat surface.

The screen unit 11C shown in FIG. 5C is configured as a display surface 1101 (hereinafter, the screen 110C is also referred to as a “first display surface 1101”) in which the central portion on the front surface side of the screen 110C is uniformly flat. On the other hand, a second display surface 1101C is formed on the front left and right ends of the screen 110C.

The second display surface 1101C has a step with the first display surface 1101 by being formed so as to have a thickness in front of the first display surface 1101, and is divided into a substantially trapezoidal shape. The long side portions 1101Ca of the second display surface 1101C are located near the left and right end portions of the screen 110C, and the short side portions 1101Cb of the second display surface 1101C are located closer to the center portion than the left and right end portions of the screen 110C.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, the thickness W1 of the long side portion 1101Ca is formed to be larger than the thickness W2 of the short side portion 1101Cb, and the thickness gradually increases from the short side portion 1101Cb to the long side portion 1101Ca. It's getting bigger. The screen unit 11C is not provided with a light emitting surface, and the second display surfaces 1101C on both the left and right sides are arranged with a sufficient size.

As shown in FIG. 6C, the projected image V1 is projected on the first display surface 1101 of the screen 110C, and the projected image V2 is projected on the second display surface 1101C on the left side when the screen 110C is viewed from the front. Then, the projected image V3 is projected on the second display surface 1101C on the right side when the screen 110C is viewed from the front. The projected images V1 to V3 basically have the same contents as the images shown in FIG. 7. Although not particularly shown, the screen 110C is also formed with an incident surface on which the light projected from the projector main body 12 is incident on the back side corresponding to the first display surface 1101 and the second display surface 1101C. The incident surface of such a screen 110C is also a uniformly flat surface.

[Screen display principle and appearance]
Next, the display principle and appearance of the screens 110A to 110C will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 12.

First, as shown in FIG. 8, in the case of the screen 110A, the light beam α projected from the projector main body 12 is reflected by the reflector 13 and then passes through the incident surface 1100 of the screen 110A and reaches the upper end of the display surface 1101. .. Further, the light ray β projected from the projector main body 12 is reflected by the reflector 13 and then passes through the incident surface 1100 of the screen 110A and reaches the lower end portion of the display surface 1101.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 10 showing a part of the screen 110A, between the upper end and the lower end of the display surface 1101, projection images V1 to V3 showing various game information (projection image V3 is not shown). Is displayed. On the left and right outside of the projected images V2 and V3 on both the left and right sides, the LED is lit or blinked according to the game state or the like through the light emitting surface 111a (the light emitting surface 111a on the right side is not shown).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, even in the case of the screen 110C, the light beam α projected from the projector main body 12 is reflected by the reflector 13 and then transmitted through the incident surface 1100 of the screen 110C to the first display surface 1101. Reach the top edge. Further, the light ray β projected from the projector main body 12 is reflected by the reflector 13 and then passes through the incident surface 1100 of the screen 110C and reaches the lower end portion of the first display surface 1101. As a result, as shown in FIG. 12, the projected image V1 is displayed on the first display surface 1101 in substantially the same manner as in the case of FIG.

On the other hand, in the vicinity of the short side portion 1101Cb of the second display surface 1101 having a predetermined thickness W2 from the incident surface 1100, the arrival positions of the light rays α and β are displaced downward by h1 and h1', respectively, due to the refraction action. Further, in the vicinity of the long side portion 1101Ca of the second display surface 1101 having a predetermined thickness W1 larger than the thickness W2, the arrival positions of the light rays α and β are further displaced downward by h2 and h2', respectively, due to the refraction action.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 12, unlike the case of FIG. 10, the second display surface 1101C is deformed into a parallel quadrilateral shape by shifting downward toward the left and right outside (projection image V3). (Not shown) is displayed.

According to the same display principle, as shown in FIG. 11, in the case of the screen 110B, the projected image V1 is displayed on the first display surface 1101 in substantially the same manner as in the case of FIG. 10, while the projection image V1 is displayed on the second display surface 1101B. , The projected images V2 and V3 (the projected image V3 is not shown) are displayed at positions shifted downward from the case of FIG. A message image is also displayed as a projected image V2a on the second display surface 1101B of the screen 110B. In the screen 110B, the portion where the projected image V2a is displayed can be replaced with the light emitting surface 111a.

Further, by replacing the screen unit 11A with the screen unit 11B (from the screen unit 11B to the screen unit 11A), the decoration function from the light emitting surface 111a to the display surface of the projected image V2a (from the display surface of the projected image V2a to the light emitting surface 111a). Can be switched.

In short, in the game display device 1 according to the first embodiment, the projection distance from the projector main body 12 to the incident surface 1100 of the screens 110A to 110C is constant in any of the screen units 11A to 11C, and the projected images V1 to V3 The visual change in is due only to the thickness and position of the screens 110A-110C. Therefore, the function of adjusting or correcting the projected image according to the projection distance can be the minimum necessary simple function, or the function itself can be omitted. This makes it possible to improve the compatibility of the screen units 11A to 11C.

According to such a game display device 1, the visual impressions of the projected images V2 and V3 on the display surfaces 1101, 1101B and 1101C can be changed by replacing the screens 110A to 110C together with the screen units 11A to 11C. For example, the display form can be freely changed by simply replacing the screens 110A to 110C according to the layout of the game hall and the design of the game machine, and the design and variety of the display form can be enhanced.

Further, according to the game display device 1 to which the screen 110A shown in FIG. 10 is applied, the projected image V1 displayed on the display surface 1101 and the light emitting mode of the light emitting surface 111a are linked, or displayed or emitted in the same pattern. Further, since the light emitting surface 111a can display the light emitted by a method completely different from the display of the projected image, the design and variety of the display form can be further enhanced.

In the present embodiment, the distance from the projector main body 12 to the incident surface 1100 is constant for all the screens 110A to 110C, but the distance is not limited to this, and for example, the distance is not partially constant. It may be an incident surface having irregularities. That is, if there are parts that are common to each other on the incident surfaces of at least a plurality of screens, the optical path length from the projector main body is constant in the common parts, so that the projected image is changed only by changing the thickness of the parts. This can be done, and thus the visual effect can be easily enhanced.

Further, according to the game display device 1 to which the screens 110A to 110C shown in FIGS. 10 to 12 are applied, the incident surface 1100 of each of the screens 110A to 110C is composed of a uniform surface, and the incident surface is formed from the projector main body 12. Since the distance to 1100 is constant, it is possible to simply configure an optical system such as a reflector 13 that forms an optical path from the projector main body 12 to the incident surface 1100, while the first display surface 1101 and the second display surface 1101B. , 1101C can easily enhance the visual effect by changing the visual impression of the projected images V2 and V3 only by making the thickness different from that of 1101C.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, according to the game display device 1, the projected images V2 on the display surfaces 1101, 1101B and 1101C are simply replaced by replacing the screens 110A to 110C arranged on the opening surface 10A of the housing 10. , Since the visual impression of V3 can be changed, the display form can be freely changed, and the design and variety of the display form can be enhanced.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the screen unit according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. The same or similar components as those according to the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the screen unit 11A shown in FIG. 13, an LED substrate 111 is provided on the back side of each of the light emitting surfaces 111a, and further, the LED substrate 111 on the left side when viewed from the back side has the LED substrate 111. A relay board 113 that is directly connected and is connected to the other LED board 111 via a connection line 114 is provided.

The relay board 113 is connected to the control unit on the housing 10 side via the cable 111B by a so-called BtoB connection method. The connection line 114 is connected to the other LED board 111 from the relay board 113, bypassing the opening 11aa. The connecting line 114 is laid via a guide member 115 so as not to hang down to the incident surface 1100. The relay board 113 may be connected to the cable 111B via the connector 111A.

The signal from the control unit is supplied to one LED board 111 via the cable 111B and the relay board 113, and is also supplied to the other LED board 111 via the relay board 113 and the connection line 114. As a result, a plurality of LEDs on both LED substrates 111 are turned on or blinked, and the light of the LEDs is emitted forward through the light emitting surface 111a.

According to such a configuration, since it is only necessary to connect the two LED boards 111 and the control unit with one connection cable 111B, the connection work when replacing the screen unit 11A can be performed more easily.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the game display device according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. The same or similar components as those according to the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, an LED substrate 20 is provided on the side surface 10b of the housing 10, and a movable decorative sheet 30 is arranged so as to face the LED substrate 20. A guide member 31 that supports the upper end of the movable decorative sheet 30 so as to be guided in the front-rear direction and a drive mechanism 32 that moves the movable decorative sheet 30 in the front-rear direction are provided on the upper portion of the side surface 10b.

The drive mechanism 32 is connected to a control unit provided in the housing 10, and the operation is controlled by this control unit. Although not particularly shown, the LED substrate 20, the movable decorative sheet 30, the guide member 31, and the drive mechanism 32 are also provided on the side surface 10c of the housing 10.

The side portions 11b, 11c of the screen unit 11A facing the side surfaces 10b, 10c are formed of a material having a light transmitting property, preferably a transparent member, at least in a region facing the LED substrate 20. A fixed decorative sheet 40 is attached to the inner surface of the side portion 11b.

Although not particularly shown, the fixed decorative sheet 40 is also attached to the inner surface of the side portion 11c. Here, it is assumed that the region facing the LED substrate 20 is a material having light transmission, but the side portion 11b or the side portion 11c where at least the portion of the LED substrate 20 to be irradiated with the LED light is irradiated. If there is, it is not particularly limited to the portion having light transmission. Further, for example, even if the light emitting surface 111a has light transmission and the side portion 11b does not have light transmission, the light contrast on the light emitting surface 111a can be enhanced by guiding the LED light to the front side. it can.

The movable decorative sheet 30 is made of a light-transmitting resin sheet having a rectangular flat surface. The movable decorative sheet 30 is formed with a plurality of light guide holes 30A having an opening area corresponding to a plurality of LEDs 20A (see FIG. 16) on the LED substrate 20 and at least exposing these LEDs 20A. The diameter of the light guide hole 30A is, for example, about 1 mm. The position distribution of the plurality of light guide holes 30A matches the position distribution of the plurality of LEDs 20A.

As shown in FIG. 15, the movable decorative sheet 30 is moved in the front-rear direction along the guide member 31 by the operation of the drive mechanism 32. As a result, the light guide hole 30A is in a state in which the light of the LED 20A is not directly guided to the outside, and the light of the LED 20A is not directly guided to the outside due to the misalignment (FIGS. 16A and 16B). reference).

Like the movable decorative sheet 30, the fixed decorative sheet 40 is made of a light-transmitting resin sheet having a rectangular flat surface, and characters, patterns, and the like are printed on the surface of the fixed decorative sheet 40. The fixed decorative sheet 40 is also formed with a plurality of light guide holes 40A having an opening area similar to that of the light guide holes 30A. The diameter of the light guide hole 40A is, for example, about 1 mm as in the light guide hole 30A.

The position distribution of the plurality of light guide holes 40A matches the position distribution of the plurality of light guide holes 30A. That is, the plurality of light guide holes 40A in the fixed decorative sheet 40 match the position distribution of the plurality of LEDs 20A, and the fixed decorative sheet 40 is attached to a position where the light guide holes 40A and the LEDs 20A face each other.

As a result, as the movable decorative sheet 30 moves in the front-rear direction, the light guide hole 40A overlaps with the light guide hole 30A to directly guide the light of the LED 20A to the outside, or the position with the light guide hole 30A. Due to the deviation, the light of the LED 20A is not directly guided to the outside (see FIGS. 16A and 16B).

The position distribution of the plurality of light guide holes 40A is said to match the position distribution of the plurality of light guide holes 30A, but the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one light guide hole 40A and one light guide hole 30A are not limited to this. It suffices if the position with is the same. In this case, the coincidence of positions means at least a position where the LED light can pass outward through the light guide hole, and is not limited to a specific position.

As shown in FIG. 16A, when the movable decorative sheet 30 is positioned so that at least a part of the LED 20A and the light guide hole 30A overlap, the light guide hole 30A is at least the light guide hole 40A of the fixed decorative sheet 40. It overlaps with a part. In this case, the light of the LED 20A is directly guided to the outside from the portion where the light guide hole 30A and the light guide hole 40A overlap. As a result, on the side surfaces 10b and 10c of the housing 10, characters and patterns drawn on the fixed decorative sheet 40 can be visually recognized with relatively high illuminance and high contrast.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the movable decorative sheet 30 is positioned so as to be displaced from the LED 20A without the light guide hole 30A overlapping the light guide hole 40A, the light of the LED 20A is both. It becomes a state in which it cannot proceed outward through the light guide holes 30A and 40A. As a result, on the side surfaces 10b and 10c of the housing 10, characters and patterns drawn on the fixed decorative sheet 40 can be visually recognized with relatively low illuminance and low contrast.

According to the game display device 1 according to the third embodiment, as the movable decorative sheet 30 moves from the overlapping position of the light guide holes 30A and 40A to the non-overlapping position, the light guide holes 30A, The overlapping portion of the 40A is gradually reduced, and the light guided from the LED 20A to the side surfaces 10b and 10c through these light guide holes 30A and 40A is gradually reduced.

That is, the movable decorative sheet 30 is moved so as to deviate from the fixed decorative sheet 40 by a predetermined dimension that is equal to or larger than the diameter of the light guide holes 30A and 40A, and the illuminance is increased according to the degree of overlap between the light guide holes 30A and 40A. Therefore, the contrast of the images displayed by the decorative sheets 30 and 40 facing each other can be easily changed by adjusting the illuminance, and the visual effect can be easily enhanced.

Further, according to the game display device 1 according to the third embodiment, since the LED substrate 20 and the drive mechanism 32 are provided on the housing 10 side, the screen unit 11A has a screen unit 11A as compared with the one according to the fourth embodiment described later. The weight can be reduced and simplified, and the labor of wiring can be saved.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the game display device according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. The game display device 1 according to the fourth embodiment is different only in the positional relationship between the movable decorative sheet 30 and the fixed decorative sheet 40 from those according to the third embodiment described above. Therefore, the same or similar components as those according to the third embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the game display device 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the fixed decorative sheet 40 is arranged so as to face the LED substrate 20 provided on the side surface 10b of the housing 10. On the other hand, on the side portion 11b of the screen unit 11A, the movable decorative sheet 30 is arranged so as to face the fixed decorative sheet 40.

A guide member 31 that supports the upper end of the movable decorative sheet 30 so as to be guided in the front-rear direction and a drive mechanism 32 that moves the movable decorative sheet 30 in the front-rear direction are provided on the upper portion of the side portion 11b. The drive mechanism 32 is connected to a control unit provided in the housing 10 via a cable (not shown), and the operation is controlled by this control unit. Although not particularly shown, the LED substrate 20 and the fixed decorative sheet 40 are also provided on the side surface 10c of the housing 10, and the movable decorative sheet 30, the guide member 31, and the drive mechanism 32 are also provided on the side portion 11c of the screen unit 11A. Has been done.

The fixed decorative sheet 40 is fixed so that the plurality of light guide holes 40A match the position distribution of the plurality of LEDs 20A. On the other hand, characters, patterns, and the like are printed on the surface of the movable decorative sheet 30, and the movable decorative sheet 30 moves in the front-rear direction along the guide member 31 by the operation of the drive mechanism 32. As a result, the light guide hole 30A does not overlap with the light guide hole 40A and directly guide the light of the LED 20A to the outside, or the light of the LED 20A is not directly guided to the outside due to the misalignment with the light guide hole 30A. It becomes.

That is, even in the game display device 1 according to the fourth embodiment, as the movable decorative sheet 30 moves from the overlapping position of the light guide holes 30A and 40A to the non-overlapping position, the light guide holes 30A and 40A are connected to each other. The overlapping portion of the light is gradually reduced, and the light guided from the LED 20A to the side surfaces 10b and 10c through these light guide holes 30A and 40A is gradually reduced.

As a result, the movable decorative sheet 30 is moved so as to deviate from the fixed decorative sheet 40 by a predetermined dimension that is equal to or larger than the diameter of the light guide holes 30A and 40A, and the light guide holes 30A and 40A are overlapped with each other according to the degree of overlap. Since the illuminance can be changed, the contrast of the images displayed by the decorative sheets 30 and 40 facing each other can be easily changed by adjusting the illuminance, and the visual effect can be easily enhanced.

Here, FIG. 18 shows an example in which the decorative sheets 30 and 40 are applied to the pachinko gaming machine 2a, and FIG. 19 shows an example in which the decorative sheets 30 and 40 are applied to the pachislot gaming machine 2b. In the pachinko gaming machine 2a and the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the movable decorative sheet 30 and the fixed decorative sheet 40 can be arranged behind the light-transmitting decorative panels 50 and 51 provided on the front surface of the housing and the like. According to such a pachinko gaming machine 2a and a pachislot gaming machine 2b, the same action and effect as those of the gaming display device 1 shown in FIGS. 14 and 17 can be obtained.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the game display device according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 23. The components that are the same as or similar to those according to the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the game display device 1 according to the fifth embodiment is composed of a concave screen 110D on the entire front surface of the screen unit 11D, and the entire front surface side of the screen 110D is gently inclined. It is a concave display surface 1101 having the above. The light emitting surface and buttons are omitted from the game display device 1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21, an LED substrate 60 and a reflector 61 are provided on the outside of the back surface 10d of the housing 10 on the back surface side of the reflector 13. A plurality of LEDs 60A are mounted on the LED substrate 60 so as to be positioned in an annular shape with respect to the back surface 10d, and the LEDs 60A are arranged so that light can be irradiated toward the reflector 61. The light of the LED 60A is reflected by the reflector 61 to illuminate the periphery of the game display device 1 and the peripheral edge of the screen 110A from the rear.

According to such a game display device 1, a projected image can be projected on the entire display surface 1101 of the screen 110D, and an effect similar to that shown in FIG. 5A can be obtained optically. The decorative effect can be enhanced by the light from the rear by the LED 60A.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, since the screen 110D is formed in a concave shape, it is possible to display a three-dimensional image having a depth. This makes it possible to further enhance the visual effect and the decorative effect.

As shown in FIG. 22, in the game display device 1 according to the first modification of the fifth embodiment, the entire front surface of the screen unit 11E is composed of the screen 110E. The central portion on the front side of the screen 110E is configured as a concave first display surface 1101 having a gentle inclination, while the left and right ends on the front side of the screen 110E have a thickness in front of the first display surface 1101. A concave second display surface 1101E that partially protrudes outward from the left and right ends of the first display surface 1101 is formed.

The second display surface 1101E has a step with the first display surface 1101 and is partitioned in a rectangular shape. According to such a game display device 1, a projected image can be projected separately on the first display surface 1101 and the second display surface 1101E of the screen 110E, which is optically different from that shown in FIG. 5 (B). The same effect can be obtained.

In the game display device 1 according to the second modification of the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23, the front center portion of the screen unit 11F is composed of the screen 110F, while the left and right end portions of the screen unit 11F are the screen 110F. And a light emitting surface 111a provided with a predetermined interval. The central portion on the front side of the screen 110F is configured as a concave first display surface 1101 having a gentle inclination, while the left and right ends on the front side of the screen 110F have a thickness in front of the first display surface 1101. A concave second display surface 1101F that partially protrudes outward from the left and right ends of the first display surface 1101 is formed.

It has a step with the second display surface 1101F and the first display surface 1101, and is divided into a substantially trapezoidal shape. A light emitting surface 111a is provided behind the second display surface 1101F protruding from the left and right ends of the first display surface 1101. According to such a game display device 1, a projected image can be projected separately on the first display surface 1101 and the second display surface 1101F of the screen 110F, which is optically different from that shown in FIG. 5 (C). The same effect can be obtained. Further, since the lighting and blinking of the light can be visually recognized through the light emitting surface 111a, it is possible to present a display form different from any of the above-mentioned game display devices.

Further, by making the second display surfaces 1101E and 1101F concave, it is possible to display a three-dimensional image having a depth together with the first display surface 1101. The second display surfaces 1101E and 1101F may be flat. The LED substrate 60 and the reflector 61 can be omitted as appropriate.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the game display device according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26. The same or similar components as those according to the above embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the sixth embodiment, for example, the upper edge (upper side) of the screen 110A (FIG. 6A) of the screen unit 11A in the first embodiment is made to emit light to improve the visual effect and the decorativeness.

In the game display device 1 according to the sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24A, the rectangular screen 110A has an incident surface (light guide portion) 1100 having a predetermined thickness and transmitting light, and a predetermined thickness. It is composed of a display surface 1101 (display unit) for displaying a projected image. Further, at least one board (LED board) 70 is installed on the bottom surface 10a of the housing 10 near the lower edge (lower side) of the screen 110A, and the screen 110A facing the lower edge (lower side) of the screen 110A. A diffused reflection portion 72 including an uneven portion that diffusely reflects light is provided on the upper edge portion (upper side) of the incident surface (light guide portion) 1100.

At least one light emitting element (LED) 71 is mounted on the base 70, and the light from the light emitting element 71 passes through the incident surface (light guide unit) 1100 of the screen 110A, reaches the diffused reflection unit 72, and is diffusely reflected there. To.

The diffused reflection portion 72 is provided over the entire upper edge portion of the screen 110A. Further, the base 70 may be provided over the entire lower edge portion of the screen 110A, but may be appropriately divided and provided. Further, the arrangement position and the emission angle of one or a plurality of light emitting elements 71 are appropriately adjusted so that the light from the light emitting element 71 reaches the entire diffused reflection unit 72 uniformly.

In the sixth embodiment configured in this way, the light from the light emitting element 71 passes through the incident surface (light guide unit) 1100 of the screen 110A, reaches the diffused reflection unit 72, is diffusely reflected there, and is directed toward the player. Is irradiated. As a result, horizontally long reflected light that borders the upper edge of the screen 110A is formed, and the visual effect and the decorative effect can be improved. A light-shielding member may be provided on the housing 10 side of the diffused reflection portion 72 so that the diffusely reflected light does not go to the inside of the housing 10 (not shown).

By the way, as shown in FIG. 24B, not all the light from the light emitting element 71 goes to the diffused reflection portion 72, and some of the light leaks from the gap between the base 70 and the bottom surface 10a. The irradiation efficiency is lowered, and the leaked light may be scattered in the housing 10 to reduce the brightness and resolution of the image from the projector main body 12.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the light-shielding member 73 is installed in the gap to prevent light from leaking to the housing 10. The light-shielding member 73 is made of an elongated strip-shaped thin plate, and is fixed to the lower edge portion of the screen 110A and the end portion of the bottom surface 10a by, for example, adhesion. The material of the light-shielding member 73 may be any material such as metal or resin as long as it has a light-shielding function, but a material having flexibility is desirable in consideration of workability.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24B, a light shielding member 74 may be appropriately provided around the light emitting element 71 so that the light from the light emitting element 71 does not direct to the display surface (display unit) 1101 of the screen 110A. ..

Further, in the sixth embodiment, an example in which the diffused reflection member 72 is provided on the upper edge portion (upper side) of the incident surface (light guide portion) 1100 of the screen 110A has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the upper portion of the screen 110A is provided. It may be provided in the screen unit 11A of the above (not shown).

Further, it goes without saying that the light emitting means according to the sixth embodiment can be applied to the screen units 11B and 11C described in the first embodiment.

According to the sixth embodiment, the light from the light emitting element 71 of the base 70 provided near the lower edge of the screen 110A emits light so as to border the upper edge of the screen 110A, thereby displaying the game display device. The visual effect and decorativeness of 1 can be improved. Moreover, by preventing the generation of leaked light from the light emitting element 71 to the inside of the housing 10, the irradiation efficiency is improved and the projected image on the screen 110A is not affected. The base 70 is provided in the vicinity of the upper edge portion, the left edge portion and / or the right edge portion of the screen 110A, and the diffused reflection portion 72 is provided in the vicinity of the upper edge portion, the left edge portion and / or the right edge portion of the screen 110A. It may be provided at the edge and / or the left edge. As a result, each edge portion (upper edge portion, lower edge portion, right edge portion and / or left edge portion) of the screen 110A can be appropriately made to emit light.

(Modification Example 1) In Modification 1, as shown in FIG. 25, in order to prevent light from leaking to the housing 10, a thin plate-shaped light-shielding member having a predetermined height is placed on the housing 10 side of the base 70. (Wall) 75 is provided. As a result, the same effects as those of the sixth embodiment can be obtained.

(Modification 2) In Modification 2, as shown in FIG. 26, the base 70 having a light-shielding function is arranged in the vertical direction, and the light from the light emitting element leaks to the inside of the housing 10 by the base 70 itself. To prevent. As a result, the same effects as those of the sixth embodiment can be obtained, and the number of parts can be reduced.

<7th Embodiment>
Next, the game display device according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 29. The same or similar components as those according to the above embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the seventh embodiment, for example, the upper edge of the concave screen 110D shown in FIG. 18 is made to emit light to improve the visual effect and the decorativeness.

As shown in FIG. 27, the game display device 1 according to the seventh embodiment has a screen 110D having an incident surface 1100 (light guide portion) having a predetermined thickness and transmitting light, and a projected image having a predetermined thickness. It is composed of a display surface 1101 (display unit) to be displayed. Further, at least one board (LED board) 70 is installed on the bottom surface 10a of the housing 10 near the lower edge of the screen 110D, and light is emitted to the upper edge of the incident surface (light guide) 1100 of the screen 110D. A diffused reflection portion 72 composed of an uneven portion or the like for diffuse reflection is provided.

The diffused reflection portion 72 is provided over the entire upper edge portion of the screen 110D, as in the sixth embodiment. Further, the base 70 may be provided over the entire lower edge portion of the screen 110D, but may be appropriately divided and provided. Further, the arrangement position and the emission angle of one or a plurality of light emitting elements 71 are appropriately adjusted so that the light from the light emitting elements reaches the entire diffused reflection unit 72 uniformly.

As a result, horizontally long reflected light that borders the upper edge of the screen 110D is formed, and the visual effect and the decorative effect can be improved. In the figure shown in FIG. 25, the LED substrate 60 and the reflector 61 are provided on the back surface of the reflector 13, but these can be omitted as appropriate.

Further, in order to prevent the light from the light emitting element 71 from leaking from the gap between the base 70 and the bottom surface 10a, a light-shielding member 73 is installed in the gap to prevent the light from leaking to the housing 10.

Further, a light-shielding member may be appropriately provided around the light-emitting element 71 so that the light from the light-emitting element 71 does not direct to the display surface 1101 of the screen 110D (see FIG. 24B).

According to the seventh embodiment, similarly to the sixth embodiment, the upper edge portion of the screen 110D is bordered by the light from the light emitting element 71 of the base 70 provided near the lower edge portion of the screen 110D. By emitting light, the visual effect and decorativeness of the game display device 1 can be improved. Moreover, by preventing the generation of leaked light from the light emitting element 71 to the inside of the housing 10, the irradiation efficiency is improved and the projected image on the screen 110D is not affected. Further, as in the sixth embodiment, the base 70 is provided near the upper edge portion, the left edge portion and / or the right edge portion of the screen 110D, and the diffused reflection portion 72 is provided on the incident surface (light guide portion) facing each other. ) It may be provided on the lower edge, the right edge and / or the left edge of the 1100. As a result, each edge portion (upper edge portion, lower edge portion, right edge portion and / or left edge portion) of the screen 110D can be appropriately made to emit light.

(Modification 1) As shown in FIG. 28, the modification 1 has a light-shielding function in order to prevent light from the light emitting element 71 from leaking into the housing 10 from the gap between the base 70 and the bottom surface 10a. The bottom surface 10a is deformed so as to close the gap. As a result, it is possible to obtain the same effect as that of the seventh embodiment and reduce the number of parts.

(Modification 2) In Modification 2, as shown in FIG. 29, the base 70 having a light-shielding function is arranged in the vertical direction, and the light from the light emitting element leaks to the inside of the housing 10 by the base 70 itself. To prevent. As a result, the same effects as those of the seventh embodiment can be obtained, and the number of parts can be reduced.

In addition, in this modification 1 and 2, the LED substrate 60 and the reflector 61 can be omitted as appropriate.

<8th Embodiment>
Next, the gaming device according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 36. The same or similar components as those according to the above embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 30 is a perspective view of the gaming device G1 according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 30, the gaming device G1 has a housing G10 and a screen unit G11 composed of a screen G110 having a concave front surface as a whole. The housing G10 has a base G101 and a projector housing G102.

FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming device G1. As shown in FIG. 31, the substrate G101 has a flat plate-shaped back surface portion G101a and a bottom surface portion G101b, and constitutes a back surface wall and a bottom surface wall of the housing G10, respectively. The projector main body 12 is mounted on the bottom surface portion G101b so as to be mounted. Further, the reflector 13 is arranged along the inner wall of the back surface portion G101a.

The projector accommodating body G102 is attached to the bottom surface portion G101b so as to cover the projector main body 12, so that the projector main body 12 is accommodated in the internal space. The upper part of the internal space is opened so that the image light emitted from the projector main body 12 can reach the reflector 13 arranged on the back surface portion G101a. The screen unit G11 is attached so as to cover the reflector 13, and is configured so that the image light reflected by the reflector 13 is applied to the screen G110.

As described above, the game device G1 of the eighth embodiment is a game display device that functions as a transmissive projector device as in the above-described embodiment, but is not limited thereto. For example, the gaming device may be a gaming display device incorporating a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence). Further, the game device is not limited to the game display device, and may be, for example, a game medium lending device, a game machine decoration unit provided in the game machine, or the like.

In the following description of the eighth embodiment, the direction perpendicular to the main surface of the back surface portion G101a may be referred to as a front-rear direction for convenience. In the front-rear direction, the screen unit G11 side of the back portion G101a may be referred to as the front side (front direction) of the gaming device G1, and the side opposite to the front side may be referred to as the rear side (rear direction, depth direction). Further, the right side and the left side when viewed from the front side may be referred to as the right side (right direction) and the left side (left direction) of the gaming device G1, respectively, and the directions including the right side and the left side may be referred to as the left and right direction. Further, the direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction and the left-right direction may be referred to as a vertical direction or a height direction.

FIG. 32 is a perspective view showing the gaming device G1 from the back side. As shown in FIGS. 30 to 32, a light guide plate G61 is arranged on the rear side of the back surface portion G101a of the substrate G101 so as to be parallel to the back surface portion G101a. That is, the light guide plate G61 is arranged in parallel in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. The light guide plate G61 has translucency, and the incident light can be guided. In the eighth embodiment, the light guide plate G61 is formed as a substantially rectangular flat plate, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may have any shape such as a circle. As shown in FIG. 32, the light guide plate G61 is fixed to the substrate G101 by the back substrate cover G62.

The gaming device G1 is generally arranged above the gaming machine 2 and the screen G110 is arranged so that the screen G110 faces the player's face with the screen G110 tilted downward from the front direction. Will be done. At this time, it is preferable that the light guide plate G61 is configured at a position and / or size at which the light guide plate G61 can be seen above the screen G110 from the player.

FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view showing the gaming device G1 from the back side. As shown in FIG. 33, the light guide plate G61 has an annular opening G61a formed so as to penetrate in the thickness direction. That is, the light guide plate G61 has an annular end surface (opening side end surface G61b) on the opening G61a side. In other words, the opening side end surface G61b forms the opening G61a of the light guide plate G61. In the eighth embodiment, the opening G61a is formed in an annular shape, but the opening G61a is not limited to this, and may be a square shape or the like. Further, a part of the peripheral edge of the opening G61a may coincide with the peripheral edge of the light guide plate G61. That is, the light guide plate G61 may be provided with a notch to form an opening G61a.

The LED substrate G60 is arranged so as to be sandwiched between the light guide plate G61 and the substrate G101. That is, the plurality of LEDs G60A are provided on the LED substrate G60, which is separate from the light guide plate G61. The LED substrate G60 mounts a plurality of LEDs G60A at positions facing the opening side end surface G61b on the light guide plate G61 side. More specifically, the plurality of LEDs G60A are arranged side by side at equal intervals on the LED substrate G60 so as to surround the opening G61a along the opening side end surface G61b. When the opening G61a is formed by a notch, the plurality of LEDG60A are arranged in an arc shape along the notch. Each LED G60A has an outlet in a direction facing the opening side end surface G61b. Therefore, the LED substrate G60 radiates light from the plurality of LEDs G60A toward the opening side end surface G61b of the light guide plate G61. Further, the optical axis of the light emitted from the plurality of LED G60A is parallel to the light guide plate G61, and the light incident on the light guide plate G61 travels in the light guide plate G61 to form the peripheral edge of the light guide plate G61. It is made reachable to the outer end face G61c. The thickness of the light guide plate G61 is set to be longer than the length of the LED G60A in the front-rear direction. This prevents the back substrate cover G62 fixing the light guide plate G61 from coming into contact with the LED G60A located in the opening G61a of the light guide plate G61.

As described above, the light from the plurality of LEDs G60A arranged in the opening G61a of the light guide plate G61 is guided in the light guide plate G61 after being incident from the opening side end surface G61b of the light guide plate G61, and is outside the light guide plate G61. Illuminate so as to cover the entire region of the end face G61c. As a result, the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs G60A spreads radially in the light guide plate G61 and reaches the outer end surface G61c, so that the entire circumference of the light guide plate G61 can be illuminated in an annular shape. The light guide plate G61 illuminated from any direction can be visually recognized, and the distinctiveness of the game machine or the like to which the game device G1 is attached can be improved.

The LED substrate G60 can individually control the lighting of a plurality of LEDs G60A. The LED substrate G60 has a memory (not shown) in which a plurality of lighting patterns are stored, and controls the plurality of LED G60A with lighting patterns corresponding to an external signal or the like. For example, the LED board G60 selects a signal indicating a game state transmitted from the game machine and a lighting pattern according to an operation performed on an input device (not shown) included in the game device G1. A plurality of LEDs G60A are controlled based on the lighting pattern. For example, by controlling with a lighting pattern in which a plurality of LED G60As are sequentially lit in the order of arrangement, it is possible to produce a drive effect in which light flows around the peripheral edge of the light guide plate G61. In addition, by selecting full-color LEDs for multiple LEDs G60A, it lights red when a call input is made by the player by operating a touch sensor, which will be described later, and blinks yellow when an abnormality occurs in the game machine. It is possible to perform various notifications such as.

The light guide plate G61 is subjected to reflection processing for reflecting a part of the light from the LED G60A in the light guide plate G61 in the thickness direction on the substrate G101 side at a plurality of places. The light guide plate G61 is subjected to reflection processing so as to form a shape having a design, so that the illumination of the shape emerges on the main surface of the light guide plate G61. Hereinafter, the reflection processing of the light guide plate G61 will be specifically described by illustrating an optical path pattern of light traveling in the light guide plate G61.

34A and 34B are explanatory views showing an example of an optical path pattern of light from the LED G60A traveling on the light guide plate G61. As shown in FIG. 34A, when the optical path of the light from the LED G60A is not reflected, the light emitted from the LED G60A is incident on the light guide plate G61 from the opening side end surface G61b and enters the light guide plate G61 in the plane direction. It proceeds in the (vertical direction) and reaches the outer end surface G61c. As a result, the entire periphery of the light guide plate G61 is illuminated in an annular shape.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 34B, the light guide plate G61 has a reflecting portion G61d that reflects light traveling in the surface direction (vertical direction) of the light guide plate G61. In the eighth embodiment, the reflecting portion G61d is a recess formed on the main surface of the light guide plate G61 opposite to the LED substrate G60. The reflecting portion G61d has a reflecting surface whose normal line is inclined by 45 degrees in the thickness direction (forward direction) with respect to the light path of the light from the LED G60A, and the light reaching the reflecting portion G61d is directed in the thickness direction (front) of the light guide plate G61. The direction) is reflected toward the LED substrate G60 side. The reflecting portion G61d may be provided inside the light guide plate by processing such as laser processing.

FIG. 35 is an explanatory view showing an example of the illumination mode of the light guide plate G61. As shown in FIG. 35, light is radially emitted from the LED G60A (see FIG. 33) arranged in the opening G61a, reaches the outer end surface G61c, and illuminates the peripheral edge of the light guide plate G61. Further, a part of the light from the LED G60A (see FIG. 33) is reflected in the forward direction by the reflecting portion G61d to form a bright spot on the main surface of the light guide plate G61. The reflective portions G61d are collectively provided so as to form the design, and the bright spots formed by the reflection portion G61d reflecting the reflective portion G61d stippling the design.

FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view showing the gaming device G1 from the back side. As shown in FIG. 36, the plurality of LEDs G60A are provided on the LED substrate G60 which is separate from the light guide plate G61. The LED substrate G60 and the light guide plate G61 have an alignment portion G60e and an alignment portion G61e for aligning the LED G60A so that the plurality of LEDs G60A are arranged at positions facing the opening side end faces G61b of the light guide plate G61. Each is provided.

Specifically, the alignment portion G60e is four through holes provided in the four corner portions of the light guide plate G61 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The alignment portion G61e is four through holes corresponding to the four alignment portions G60e. Similarly, the alignment portion G62e is formed on the back substrate cover G62 that sandwiches the light guide plate G61 with the LED substrate G60.

The back surface portion G101a of the base G101 is provided with an alignment member G101e for performing alignment in cooperation with the alignment portions G60e and G61e of the LED substrate G60 and the light guide plate G61. The alignment member G101e has a cylindrical shape having a cross section that engages with the alignment portions G60e, G61e, and G62e, and is longer than the combined thickness of the LED substrate G60, the light guide plate G61, and the back substrate cover G62. It is provided so as to project rearward from the substrate G101.

In this way, the LED substrate G60, the light guide plate G61, and the back substrate cover G62 are detachably arranged with respect to the substrate G101. The LED substrate G60, the light guide plate G61, and the alignment portions G60e, G61e, and G62e of the back substrate cover G62 are sequentially inserted into the alignment member G101e of the substrate G101 to perform alignment.

When the light guide plate G61 is aligned, first, the alignment portion G61e of the light guide plate G61 is aligned with the protruding end portion of the alignment member G101e of the base G101 and inserted. Then, the light guide plate G61 is moved in the forward direction while being restricted from moving in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction by the alignment member G101e, and is arranged so as to be mounted on the LED substrate G60. In this way, the light guide plate G61 is restricted only to movement in the front-rear direction by the alignment member G101e. This makes it possible to prevent the light guide plate G61 from coming into contact with the LED G60A provided so as to be placed on the LED substrate G60 at the time of alignment.

(Outline of Eighth Embodiment)
As described above, the gaming device G1 of the eighth embodiment is detachably arranged on the base G101, and is a light guide plate having a translucent property formed so that the opening side end surface G61b having a predetermined shape penetrates in the thickness direction. It has a G61 and a plurality of LEDs G60A arranged at positions facing the opening side end surface G61b forming the opening G61a of the light guide plate G61, and the plurality of LED G60A are arranged side by side along the opening side end surface G61b. The light guide plate G61 is subjected to a reflection process that reflects a part of the light guided from the plurality of LEDs G60A into the light guide plate G61 via the opening side end faces G61b in the thickness direction of the light guide plate G61. The reflective portion G61d is formed.

According to the above configuration, the light from the plurality of LEDs G60A arranged in the opening of the light guide plate G61 is guided in the light guide plate G61 after being incident from the opening side end surface G61b of the light guide plate G61, and is guided in the light guide plate G61. Illuminate so as to cover the entire region of the outer end face G61c of. On the other hand, a part of the light guided in the light guide plate G61 by the reflection processing applied to the light guide plate G61 is emitted from the surface of the light guide plate G61 by the reflection portion G61d subjected to the reflection processing. As a result, the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs G60A spreads radially in the light guide plate G61 and reaches the outer end surface G61c, so that the entire circumference of the light guide plate G61 can be illuminated in an annular shape. The light guide plate G61 illuminated from any direction can be visually recognized, and the distinguishability of the game machine to which the game device G1 is attached can be improved. Further, the design can be improved by the light emitted from the surface of the light guide plate G61, and since the light guide plate G61 is removable from the base G101, it can be replaced with a light guide plate G61 which has been subjected to a reflection process of a different design. Since it is possible, the gaming device G1 can be applied to various types of gaming machines.

Further, in the gaming device G1 of the eighth embodiment, the plurality of LEDs G60A are provided on the LED substrate G60 which is separate from the light guide plate G61, and the LED substrate G60 and the light guide plate G61 are guided by the plurality of LEDs G60A. Alignment portions G60e and G61e are provided so as to be arranged at positions facing the opening side end faces G61b of the light plate G61.

According to the above configuration, the light guide plate G61 that is detachably arranged is arranged by the alignment portions G60e and G61e so that the plurality of LEDs G60A are positioned so as to face the opening side end surface G61b of the light guide plate G61. To. As a result, the alignment portions G60e and G61e perform accurate alignment, so that it is possible to prevent deterioration of the visual effect due to misalignment.

Further, in the gaming device G1 of the eighth embodiment, the substrate G101 is provided with an alignment member G101e for aligning in cooperation with the LED substrate G60 and the alignment portions G60e and G61e of the light guide plate G61. ing.

According to the above configuration, the alignment members G60e and G61e of the LED substrate G60 and the light guide plate G61 cooperate with the alignment member G101e provided on the substrate G101 to perform alignment. As a result, the LED substrate G60 and the light guide plate G61 are aligned with each other and also with respect to the substrate G101, so that it is possible to prevent the visual effect from being lowered due to the misalignment.

Further, in the gaming device G1 of the eighth embodiment, the shape of the opening G61a is annular, and the plurality of LED G60A are arranged in an annular shape along the opening side end surface G61b in the annular opening G61a.

According to the above configuration, a plurality of LED G60As are arranged in an annular shape along the opening side end surface G61b in the annularly formed opening G61a. As a result, a plurality of LED G60A are arranged in an annular shape along the opening side end surface G61b of the light guide plate G61, thereby minimizing the number of LED G60A and further making the light of the plurality of LED G60A more efficient with respect to the light guide plate G61. It is possible to make the outer end surface G61c of the light guide plate G61 shine more effectively.

<9th embodiment>
Next, the gaming device according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. The same or similar components as those according to the above embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. In the ninth embodiment, different aspects of the projector housing G102 (see FIGS. 31 and 32) described in the eighth embodiment will be described, and the description will be omitted because other configurations and the like are the same as those in the eighth embodiment. To do.

FIG. 37 is a perspective view of the projector housing F102 included in the gaming device F1 according to the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 37, the projector accommodating body F102 is attached to the base G101 below the screen unit G11 so as to cover the projector main body 12 (see FIG. 31), thereby accommodating the projector main body 12 in the internal space. Similar to the eighth embodiment, the upper part of the internal space is opened so that the image light emitted from the projector main body 12 can reach the reflector 13 arranged on the back surface portion G101a. Further, the projector housing F102 of the ninth embodiment has a function of an input device for receiving an input of a player and a function of notifying the player. Hereinafter, the projector housing F102 will be specifically described.

The projector housing F102 has an exterior panel F1021 that forms the front outer shape of the projector housing F102. The exterior panel F1021 has a touch region F1021a, a speaker unit F1021c, and a light receiving unit F1021d.

The touch area F1021a is a rectangular input area set according to the shape of the touch sensor F1022 (see FIG. 38) described later. The touch region F1021a is provided with a translucent portion F1021b having translucency, so that light emitted from the back side can be transmitted. In the ninth embodiment, the translucent portion F1021b is composed of a rectangular design indicating the touch area F1021a, a pattern indicating a "hand" arranged in the rectangular design, and a text indicating "CALL". Not limited to. Further, in the ninth embodiment, the exterior panel F1021 is formed of a translucent material and then printed with a non-transparent ink so as to leave the translucent portion F1021b, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be formed by providing a translucent material so as to be flush with the exterior panel F1021, or it may be simply a through hole penetrating the exterior panel F1021. Further, the light transmitting portion F1021b may be provided with an optical sheet (optical film) for diffusely reflecting light on the back side after forming a through hole penetrating the exterior panel F1021.

The speaker unit F1021c is a through hole for outputting sound from the speaker F10253 (see FIGS. 38 and 39) described later to the outside. Further, the light receiving unit F1021d is an input device for receiving a signal by infrared rays or the like from the outside.

FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the projector housing F102. As shown in FIG. 38, the projector housing F102 includes the exterior panel F1021 described above, the touch sensor F1022, the light guide plate F1023, the LED array F1024 provided on the upper edge of the light guide plate F1023, the substrate F1025, and a frame. It has a body F1026 and a housing base F1027.

The accommodating substrate F1027 forms the outer shape of the projector accommodating body F102 with the exterior panel F1021, and accommodates the touch sensor F1022, the light guide plate F1023, the LED array F1024, and the substrate F1025 between the accommodating substrate F1021 and the exterior panel F1021. Further, the accommodating substrate F1027 is provided with a light receiving element for the above-mentioned speaker and the light receiving unit F1021d to receive an optical signal from the outside. The projector main body 12 (see FIG. 31) is accommodated on the side opposite to the exterior panel F1021 of the accommodating base F1027. Further, the accommodating base F1027 is provided with a speaker F10253 for outputting sound from the speaker unit F1021c at the upper left portion on the front surface side.

The substrate F1025 has a function of receiving input from the touch sensor F1022 and the light receiving unit F1021d and a function of controlling the lighting of the LED array F1024.

The LED array F1024 is an LED unit in which a plurality of full-color LEDs are arranged in parallel, and emits light in a planar manner from the upper edge of the light guide plate F1023 toward the light guide plate F1023. The light guide plate F1023 is provided on the back side of the touch sensor F1022, and the light from the LED array F1024 is transmitted while being reflected by the reflective sheet provided on the rear surface side of the light guide plate F1023, and is provided on the front side of the light guide plate F1023. Surface light is emitted from the diffused sheet. That is, the light guide plate F1023 has a function of guiding the light from the LED array F1024 toward the light transmitting portion F1021b of the exterior panel F1021 provided on the front side via the touch sensor F1022. As a result, the translucent portion F1021b having translucency is illuminated.

The touch sensor F1022 has translucency and is arranged on the back side of the exterior panel F1021 in association with the touch region F1021a. As a result, the touch sensor F1022 can detect the touch input to the touch area F1021a by the player.

The light guide plate F1023 on which the touch sensor F1022 and the LED array F1024 are arranged, and the substrate F1025 are attached to the frame body F1026 and also attached to the central portion of the housing base F1027 on the exterior panel F1021 side.

FIG. 39 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the projector housing F102. As shown in FIG. 39, the substrate F1025 includes a control circuit F10250, a ROMF10251, a RAMF10252, and a communication interface F10254. The control circuit F10250 has a CPU, a circuit for controlling the LED array F1024, and the speaker F10253. The ROMF10251 stores a lighting pattern or the like for controlling the lighting of the LED array. RAMF10252 temporarily stores input information and the like from the outside. The communication interface F10254 is for communicating with, for example, the LED substrate G60 (see FIG. 33) in addition to the game machine 2 (see FIG. 1). The communication from the game machine 2 may be performed via the LED board G60 or a control board (not shown) that controls the LED board G60. Further, instead of receiving the signal directly from the game machine, it may be indirectly received from another device, for example, a server or a controller in the game hall.

As described above, the substrate F1025 is configured so that the illumination of the translucent portion F1021b can be changed based on the information from the touch sensor F1022 and the game machine 2. Further, since it is connected to the LED substrate G60 for illuminating the light guide plate G61 arranged on the back surface of the game device G1, for example, the illumination of the light transmitting portion F1021b and the illumination of the light guide plate G61 are synchronized. It is possible to perform various effects and notifications.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the control process executed by the control circuit F10250. The operation of the control circuit F10250 will be described with reference to FIG. 40.

As shown in FIG. 40, first, the control circuit F10250 determines whether or not there is an input (S1). The input includes an input to the touch sensor F1022 by the player and an input of a signal indicating the gaming state from the game machine 2. If there is no input (S1: NO), step S1 is executed again. In addition, there may be a control process when there is no input. For example, as long as there is no input to the touch sensor F1022, the translucent unit F1021b (LED array F1024) may continue to be illuminated in a predetermined manner.

When there is an input (S1: YES), the control circuit F10250 determines the input type (S2). After that, the control circuit F10250 determines the control target (S3). That is, the control circuit F10250 selects an actuator to be controlled according to the input type. The actuator includes an LED array F1024, a speaker F10253, and a plurality of LEDs G60A of the LED substrate G60. That is, the ROM F10251 stores a data table associated with the actuator to be controlled according to the input type, and the control circuit F10250 refers to the data table to acquire the actuator according to the input type.

Then, the control circuit F10250 selects a control pattern in which a predetermined control pattern is used to control the actuator (S4). That is, the ROM F10251 stores a data table associated with the actuator control patterns according to the input type, and the control circuit F10250 acquires the control pattern for each actuator with reference to the data table.

After that, the control circuit F10250 controls the actuator with the selected control pattern (S5), and ends the process. Specifically, when there is an input from the player to the touch sensor F1022, control is performed to change the illumination mode of the translucent unit F1021b (LED array F1024) to a predetermined pattern. When controlling a plurality of LEDs G60A in response to an input to the touch sensor F1022, the control circuit F10250 transmits a control signal to the LED board G60 or a control board that controls the LED board G60, and a plurality of LEDs G60A are controlled. LEDG60A is controlled.

Further, when touch-operated by the player, the control circuit F10250 emits light of the LED G60A in a predetermined manner with respect to the LED substrate G60 and / or the projector control means described above, and / or displays a predetermined image on the screen G110. You may instruct them to do so. When the control circuit F10250 gives a light emission instruction to the LED substrate G60, not only the translucent part F1021b and the screen G110 of the touch area F1021a in front of the player, but also the light guide plate G61 which is larger than the main body visible from the side of the game machine. Is lit in a predetermined mode (for example, lit in red), so that the manager of the game hall identifies the game machine being called (the game machine to which the game device G1 for which the call input is made by the player is attached). It will be easier. Further, the game hall manager normally operates the touch sensor F1022 (touch area F1021a) to turn off the light when arriving at the called game machine, but the LED board F1025 side of the LEDG60A according to the time from the touch operation. The lighting mode may be changed. For example, the control circuit F10250 lights the LEDG60A in red at the timing when the player's operation is performed, changes it to blinking red 30 seconds after the player's operation timing, and 1 minute elapses from the player's operation timing. After that, it may be controlled to change to red blinking faster than before. As a result, the time from the timing operated by the player can be determined at a glance even if the game hall manager is away from the game machine, and even if there are multiple game machines called, the priority of correspondence is given. By making it possible to attach an appropriate service to the player, it becomes possible to provide an appropriate service.

In this way, the control circuit F10250 controls to change the lighting mode of the LED G60A, which is a plurality of light sources for the light guide plate G61, when there is a touch input to the touch region F1021a. Further, the control circuit F10250 controls to change the lighting mode of the plurality of LEDG60A according to the elapsed time from the timing when the touch input to the touch area F1021a is received. Here, the change of the lighting mode includes a change from a non-lighting state to a lighting state and a change from a certain lighting state to a specific lighting state. Further, the change in the lighting mode of the LEDG60A may be intermittently changed at predetermined timings as described above, or may be continuously changed according to the elapsed time (color gradually changes, The blinking interval may change gradually). Further, the control of the plurality of LEDs G60A based on the touch input to the touch region F1021a is limited to being performed by sending an instruction signal from the control circuit F10250 to the LED substrate G60 and / or the projector control means as described above. Not done. For example, the control circuit F10250 may directly control the plurality of LEDG60A by configuring the gaming device F1 so that the plurality of LEDG60A are connected to the control circuit F10250.

(Outline of 9th Embodiment)
The gaming device F1 of the ninth embodiment has an exterior panel F1021 provided with a translucent portion F1021b having translucency in a touch region touched by the player, and a backside of the exterior panel F1021 having translucency. The touch sensor F1022, which is provided in association with the touch area F1021a to detect the touch input to the touch area F1021a, the LED array F1024, and the light from the LED array F1024 are provided on the back side of the touch sensor F1022. It has a light guide plate F1023 that guides the light-transmitting portion F1021b in the direction of the light-transmitting portion F1021b, and a control circuit F10250 that controls lighting of the LED array F1024.

According to the above configuration, when there is a touch input from the player in the touch area F1021a, the touch sensor F1022 detects the touch input. On the other hand, the control circuit F10250 is turned on by the lighting control of the LED array F1024, the light from the LED array F1024 is guided to the translucent portion F1021b, and the player can visually recognize the light from the translucent portion F1021b. It becomes. With such a configuration, the translucent portion F1021b in the touch region F1021a of the exterior panel F1021 is irradiated with the light from the LED array F1024, so that the player can easily recognize the place to be touched, and further, the conventional call button can be used. Since the input is performed on the touch region F1021a formed in a plane instead of being movable, it is possible to prevent a failure due to dust or the like entering the operating part and a failure due to fatigue of the moving part. Become.

In the gaming device F1 of the ninth embodiment, the control circuit F10250 controls to change the lighting mode of the LED array F1024 when there is a touch input to the touch area F1021a.

According to the above configuration, the player can recognize that his / her touch has been input by changing the lighting mode of the LED array F1024 that illuminates the translucent unit F1021b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from touching the touch area F1021a many times until the clerk is called, and the surface of the touch area is deteriorated.

In the gaming device F1 of the ninth embodiment, a light guide plate G61 having a translucent property, which is detachably arranged on a base G101 and is formed so that an opening side end surface G61b having a predetermined shape penetrates in the thickness direction, and the said light guide plate G61. It has a plurality of LEDs G60A arranged at positions facing the opening side end surface G61b forming the opening G61a of the light guide plate G61, and the plurality of LED G60A are arranged so as to be arranged side by side along the opening side end surface G61b. The light guide plate G61 is reflected by a reflection process that reflects a part of the light guided from the plurality of LEDs G60A into the light guide plate G61 via the end face G61b on the opening side in the thickness direction of the light guide plate G61. A unit G61d is formed, and the control circuit F10250 may control the plurality of LEDG60A to be changed to a specific lighting mode when there is a touch input to the touch region F1021a.

According to the above configuration, the light emitted from the plurality of LED G60A in response to the touch input of the player has a specific lighting mode, and spreads radially in the light guide plate G61 to reach the outer end face of the light guide plate G61. It becomes possible to illuminate the entire surroundings of the game in a ring shape, and the light guide plate G61 illuminated in a specific lighting mode can be visually recognized from any direction of the game device F1, and the manager of the game hall can perform touch input. It becomes easy to identify the game machine to which the broken game device F1 is attached. Further, the design can be improved by the light emitted from the surface of the light guide plate G61, and since the light guide plate G61 is removable from the substrate, it can be replaced with the light guide plate G61 which has been subjected to reflection processing of a different design. Therefore, the gaming device F1 can be applied to various types of gaming machines.

In the gaming device F1 of the ninth embodiment, the control circuit F10250 may control to change the lighting mode of the plurality of LEDG60A according to the elapsed time from the timing when the touch input to the touch area F1021a is received. Good.

According to the above configuration, the manager of the game hall can determine at a glance the time from the timing when the player touch-inputs the time, even if the position is far from the game machine, by visually recognizing the lighting mode of the light guide plate G61. , Even if there are a plurality of gaming devices F1 to which touch input has been performed, it is possible to prioritize the correspondence, so that it is possible to provide an appropriate service to the player.

[A specific example of the configuration of a game machine to which the game display device (game device) according to the first to ninth embodiments is connected]
Next, a specific example of the configuration of the game machine to which the game display device (game device) according to the first to ninth embodiments described above is connected will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. In this example, the pachi-slot game machine 2b is taken as an example of the game machine.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an external structure of the pachislot game machine 2b, FIGS. 42 and 43 are diagrams showing a circuit configuration of the pachislot game machine 2b, and FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a game display device 1 (game device). ) And the pachislot game machine 2b, and FIG. 45 is a diagram showing the functional flow of the pachislot game machine 2b.

<External structure of pachislot machine>
As shown in FIG. 41, the housing forming the entire pachislot game machine 2b includes a box-shaped cabinet and a front door 202 for opening and closing the cabinet. Lamps 214 capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors are provided on the left and right sides of the front surface of the front door 202.

The lamp 214 is composed of existing light emitting elements capable of emitting light at least in green, yellow, blue, and red, such as a light emitting diode (LED) and organic electroluminescence (organic EL), and is produced by light in various light emitting modes. I do.

Further, vertically elongated rectangular display windows 221L, 221C, and 221R are provided substantially in the center of the front surface of the front door 202. A center line 208 in the middle stage is set in the display windows 221L, 221C, and 221R. The center line 208 is a winning determination line that is activated by operating the bet button 211, which will be described later, or by inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 222 (these operations are referred to as "insertion operations"). The activated winning judgment line is also referred to as a "valid line". Further, in this example, one effective line is set, but a plurality of effective lines may be set.

On the back surface of the front door 202, a plurality of reels 203L, 203C, 203R are rotatably provided in a horizontal row. On each reel 203L, 203C, 203R, a symbol sequence as identification information composed of a plurality of types of symbols required for the game is drawn on the outer peripheral surface thereof, and the symbols of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R are Through the display windows 221L, 221C, and 221R, the pachislot machine 2b can be visually recognized from the outside. Further, each reel 203L, 203C, 203R rotates at a constant speed rotation (for example, 80 rotations / minute), and the symbol sequence is displayed in a variable manner.

A back lamp (not shown) is provided inside each of the reels 203L, 203C, and 203R. The back lamp illuminates the symbols of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R from behind, and corresponds to the three symbols displayed on the display windows 221L, 221C, 221R, and one reel 203L, 203C, For 203R, three light sources are provided vertically side by side. These light sources illuminate each symbol so that it is easy to see while the reels 203L, 203C, and 203R are rotating, and after stopping, notify the winning combination in a specific lighting mode (or blinking mode). It is also used for directing.

A liquid crystal display device 205 is provided above the display windows 221L, 221C, and 221R. The liquid crystal display device 205 has a display surface larger than the display windows 221L, 221C, and 221R, and performs various image display effects. Further, speakers 209L and 209R are provided in the lower part of the front surface of the front door 202 to produce various sound effects and sounds such as voice.

A 7-segment display 213 composed of 7-segment LEDs is provided on the left side of the display windows 221L, 221C, and 221R. The 7-segment display 213 is a pachislot game machine, a game medal display area that displays the number of medals inserted in this game (number of inserted medals) or the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (number of medals to be paid out). It is composed of an area such as a credit display area for displaying the number of medals (number of credits) deposited inside 2b and a section display area for displaying information indicating whether or not the section is advantageous, which will be described later. , Various information is digitally displayed to the player. The section display area may be provided at an arbitrary position on the front door 202 separately from the 7-segment display 213. In this case, this section display area is separately configured as a section display. Further, in this case, the section display may use another light source (for example, LED or the like) without using the 7-segment display.

Below the display windows 221L, 221C, and 221R, a substantially horizontal pedestal portion 210 is formed. Within the horizontal plane of the pedestal portion 210, a medal insertion slot 222 is provided on the right side, and a bet button 211 is provided on the left side.

When medals are deposited inside the pachislot machine 2b, by pressing the bet button 211, the number of medals used for the unit game (for example, 3) is inserted, and the above-mentioned winning determination is made. The line is activated.

An effect button 246 is provided on the upper part of the medal insertion slot 222. The effect button 246 is operated at a predetermined timing when the predetermined effect is executed, so that, for example, the displayed image can be changed, or a desired operation can be selected or determined on the menu screen. Used when.

Stop buttons 207L, 207C, 207R are provided at substantially the center of the front surface of the pedestal portion 210 as stop operation means for stopping the rotation of the three reels 203L, 203C, 203R by a player's pressing operation. ing. In this example, the unit game is basically started by operating the start lever 206 described later, and ends when the rotation of all the reels 203L, 203C, 203R is stopped.

On the left side of the front portion of the pedestal portion 210, a settlement button 212 for switching the credit / payout of medals acquired by the player in the game by a push button operation is provided. By operating the settlement button 212, the medals acquired by the player can be deposited inside the pachislot machine 2b, or the medals are paid out from the medal payout outlet 215 described later and the medal receiving unit 216 described later. It is selected whether it will be stored in. On the right side of the settlement button 212, a start operation for starting the rotation of all reels 203L, 203C, 203R by the rotation operation of the player and starting the variable display of the symbol in the display windows 221L, 221C, 221R. A start lever 206 as a means is rotatably attached within a predetermined angle range.

In front of the lower part of the front door 202, a medal payout outlet 215 from which medals are paid out and a medal receiving portion 216 for storing the paid out medals are provided. Further, on the front surface of the lower part of the front door 202, which is sandwiched between the stop buttons 207L, 207C, 207R and the medal receiving portion 216, a lumbar panel 220 having a design corresponding to the motif of the model is attached. Has been done.

Grip portions 247 are provided on both sides of the cabinet, making it easy to carry when moving the pachi-slot game machine 2b, such as when installing the pachi-slot game machine 2b. Further, the game display device 1 (game device) is provided on a so-called game island and is included in the island equipment (not shown), but in this example, it is arranged above the cabinet. It is attached.

<Circuit configuration of pachislot machine>
As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the pachislot game machine 2b in this example includes a main control circuit 271, a sub control circuit 272, an external relay terminal plate 217, and a peripheral device (actuator) electrically connected to these. ing.

(Main control circuit)
The main control circuit 271 has a microcomputer 230 installed on a circuit board (main control board) as a main component. The microcomputer 230 is composed of a CPU (hereinafter, main CPU) 231 and a ROM (hereinafter, main ROM) 232 and a RAM (hereinafter, main RAM) 233.

The main ROM 232 includes various control programs executed by the main CPU 231 (FIG. 48 or 51 described later), a data table such as an internal lottery table (FIG. 47 or 50 described later), and various sub-control circuits 272. Data for transmitting a control command (command) and the like are stored, and the main CPU 231 controls the progress of the game according to this information. The main RAM 233 is provided with a storage area (not shown) for storing various data such as an internal winning combination and a game state determined by executing a control program.

A clock pulse generation circuit 234, a frequency divider 235, a random number generator 236, and a sampling circuit 237 are connected to the main CPU 231. The clock pulse generation circuit 234 and the frequency divider 235 generate a clock pulse. The main CPU 231 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 236 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 237 extracts one or a plurality of necessary values (random number values) from the generated random numbers.

A switch or the like is connected to the input port of the microcomputer 230. The main CPU 231 receives an input from a switch or the like and controls the operation of peripheral devices such as stepping motors 249L, 249C, and 249R. The stop switch 207S detects that each of the three stop buttons 207L, 207C, and 207R has been pressed by the player (stop operation). Further, the start switch 206S detects that the start lever 206 has been operated by the player (start operation).

The medal sensor 242S detects that the medal received in the medal insertion slot 222 has passed through a medal detection device (selector) (not shown). Further, the bet switch 211S detects that the bet button 211 has been pressed by the player. Further, the settlement switch 212S detects that the settlement button 212 has been pressed by the player.

Peripheral devices whose operation is controlled by the microcomputer 230 include stepping motors 249L, 249C, 249R, a 7-segment display 213, and a medal payout device (hopper) 240. Further, a circuit for controlling the operation of each peripheral device is connected to the output port of the microcomputer 30.

The motor drive circuit 239 controls the drive of the stepping motors 249L, 249C, 249R provided corresponding to the reels 203L, 203C, 203R. The reel position detection circuit 250 detects, according to each reel 203L, 203C, 203R, a reel index indicating that the reels 203L, 203C, 203R have made one rotation by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit.

The stepping motors 249L, 249C, and 249R have a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of pulse outputs and the rotation axis can be stopped at a specified angle. The driving force of the stepping motors 249L, 249C, 249R is transmitted to the reels 203L, 203C, 203R via gears having a predetermined reduction ratio. Each time a pulse is output to the stepping motors 249L, 249C, 249R, the reels 203L, 203C, 203R rotate at a constant angle.

The reel position detection circuit 250 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motors 249L, 249C, and 249R after detecting the reel index. As a result, the main CPU 231 manages the rotation angles of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R (that is, how many symbols the reels 203L, 203C, 203R have rotated) and is arranged on the surface of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R. The position of each symbol is managed.

The display unit drive circuit 248 controls the operation of the 7-segment display 213. Further, the hopper drive circuit 241 controls the operation of the hopper 240. Further, the payout completion signal circuit 251 manages the detection of medals performed by the medal detection unit 240S provided in the hopper 240, and checks whether or not the number of medals discharged to the outside from the hopper 240 has reached the number of medals to be paid out.

The external relay terminal plate 217 outputs a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, an advantageous section signal, and the like, which will be described later, to the outside. The signal from the external relay terminal board 217 is input to an external device such as a game display device 1, a game medium lending device 3, and a server device 4. Details of the signal output from the external relay terminal plate 217 will be described later.

(Sub-control circuit)
The sub-control circuit 272 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 271, and performs processing such as determination and execution of the effect content based on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 271. The sub-control circuit 272 basically includes a CPU (hereinafter, sub-CPU) 281, a ROM (hereinafter, sub-ROM) 282, a RAM (hereinafter, sub-RAM) 283, a rendering processor 284, a drawing RAM 285, a driver 287, and a DSP (hereinafter, sub-CPU). It includes a digital signal processor) 288, an audio RAM 289, an A / D converter 290, and an amplifier 291.

The sub CPU 281 controls the effect according to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 271 and according to the information such as the control program and the effect data stored in the sub ROM 282. The sub RAM 283 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect content and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as the internal winning combination and the game state transmitted from the main control circuit 271.

In the control program stored in the sub ROM 282, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 271 and determining and registering the effect content (effect data) based on the communication content is determined. An animation task that controls the display of images by the liquid crystal display device 205 based on the content of the effect, a lamp control task that controls the output of light by the lamp 214, a sound control task that controls the output of sound by the speakers 209L and 209R, and the like are included. ..

The effect data stored in the sub ROM 282 includes, for example, various data tables, effect configuration data constituting each effect content, animation data related to video creation, sound data related to BGM and sound effects, and a pattern of turning on and off the light. Lamp data etc. are included.

Further, a liquid crystal display device 205, speakers 209L, 209R, a lamp 214, and an effect button 246 are connected to the sub-control circuit 272 as peripheral devices whose operations are controlled.

The sub CPU 281, the rendering processor 284, the drawing RAM 285 (including the frame buffer 286), and the driver 287 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect content, and display the created image on the liquid crystal display device 205.

Further, the sub CPU 281, the DSP 288, the audio RAM 289, the A / D converter 290, and the amplifier 291 output sounds such as BGM by the speakers 209L and 209R according to the sound data specified by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 281 turns on and off the lamp 214 according to the lamp data specified by the effect content.

(Control unit of display device for games)
The control unit 100 of the game display device 1 (game device) is electrically connected to the main control circuit 271 via an external relay terminal plate 217, and the relay circuit (see FIG. 44) is connected from the main control circuit 271. Based on various signals transmitted via the system, processing such as production display control and game information display control is performed. The control unit 100 basically includes a display CPU 101, a display ROM 102, a display RAM 103, and a drive circuit group 104.

The display CPU 101 controls the image display related to the effect display and the display of the game information according to the control program stored in the display ROM 102 in response to various signals transmitted from the main control circuit 271 and the player's selection operation. I do. The display RAM 103 stores various information about the pachislot machine 2b, data aggregated by the display CPU 101, and the like in response to various signals transmitted from the main control circuit 271. Further, the drive circuit group 104 is used for driving and controlling various devices and various units described in the first to ninth embodiments.

<Connection configuration of game display device (game device) and pachislot game machine>
As shown in FIG. 44, the game display device 1 (game device) and the pachislot game machine 2b of this example are connected in one direction via an external relay terminal plate 217. Specifically, the main control board 271 outputs (transmits) various signals to the game display device 1 (game device) through the plurality of signal lines L1 to L8.

The signal line L1 is mainly used as a medal insertion signal indicating the number of inserted medals required for the start of the unit game when the start lever 206 is operated at the start of the unit game, with one pulse per one. It is output from the control board 271 to the game display device 1. The medal insertion signal may be output from the signal line L1 when the medal is inserted, regardless of whether or not the start lever 206 is operated.

The signal line L2 outputs the number of medals paid out by the medal payout device 240 as a result of the unit game from the main control board 271 to the game display device 1 as a medal payout signal indicating one pulse per medal payout signal. ..

When the signal lines L3 and L4 shift to a special gaming state (bonus gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, the current gaming state of the signal lines L3 and L4 is a special gaming state until the special gaming state (bonus gaming state) ends. A bonus mid-bonus signal indicating that the state (bonus game state) is output is output from the main control board 271 to the game display device 1. For example, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, when a plurality of types of special gaming states (bonus gaming states) are provided, and when the first special gaming state (bonus gaming state) occurs, the signal line L3 One bonus signal (bonus signal 1) is output, and when a second special gaming state (bonus gaming state) occurs, another bonus signal (bonus signal 2) is output from the signal line L4. By doing so, the game display device 1 side can recognize the type of the transferred special game state (bonus game state) and the number of occurrences thereof. However, when only one type of special gaming state (bonus gaming state) is provided in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, only one of the signal line L3 or the signal line L4 is used, and the other is unused. You can also.

When the signal line L5 shifts to the advantageous section described later, or when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the main control board transmits an advantageous section signal indicating that the signal line L5 is an advantageous section until the end of the advantageous section. It is output from 271 to the game display device 1. The advantageous section signal is output only once at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the game or at the end of the game) when the section shifts to the advantageous section or when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section. It may be. Further, for example, even if the pachislot gaming machine 2b is provided with an advantageous section, whether or not it is an advantageous section is notified only by the above-mentioned section display so that the advantageous section signal is not output. May be good. Further, for example, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, when a plurality of types of advantageous sections are provided, the same advantageous section signal is output from the signal line L5 regardless of which advantageous section occurs. Alternatively, when the first advantageous section (for example, the first advantageous section described later) occurs, one advantageous section signal (advantageous section signal 1) is output from the signal line L5, and the second advantageous section is output. When (for example, the second advantageous section described later) occurs, another advantageous section signal (advantageous section signal 2) is output from the other signal line (for example, the unused signal line L4 described above). It may be.

When the game state shifts to a specific RT game state, the signal line L6 sends a signal during RT indicating that the game state is in the specific RT game state from the main control board 271 until the end of the specific RT game state. Output to the display device 1. Here, in the specific RT gaming state, when a plurality of RT gaming states are provided in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, there is a relatively high probability that the replay combination in which the re-game is activated is determined as the internal winning combination. One of the high RT gaming states is generally defined as a specific RT gaming state, but the low RT gaming with a relatively low probability that the replay combination will be determined as the internal winning combination. One RT gaming state of the states may be defined as a particular RT gaming state. The RT in-game signal may be output only once at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the game or at the end of the game) when the state shifts to a specific RT game state. Further, for example, even if a plurality of RT gaming states are provided in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the RT during RT signal may not be output without defining a specific RT gaming state.

The signal line L7 is a front door that is in the open state when various errors occur in the pachislot game machine 2b, until the generated errors are resolved, or when the front door 202 is in the open state. Until the 202 is closed, a security signal indicating that an error or the like has occurred in the pachislot game machine 2b is output from the main control board 271 to the game display device 1.

The signal line L8 is used as a so-called common signal line, and is provided so as to electrically connect the main control board 271 and the external relay terminal board 217. Therefore, it is not provided between the external relay terminal plate 217 and the game display device 1.

The configurations and uses of the signal lines L1 to L8 are merely examples, and the number of signal lines and the types of signals to be output are not limited to those described above, and the configuration of the pachislot gaming machine 2b or the game It shall be possible to change as appropriate according to the configuration of the display device 1.

Further, in this example, the main control board 271 and the external relay terminal board 217 are connected in parallel by signal lines L1 to L8 (that is, signals are transmitted in parallel), and are connected to the external relay terminal board 217. The game display device 1 is also configured to be connected in parallel by signal lines L1 to L7, but the transmission method is not limited to this. For example, one or both of the main control board 271 and the external relay terminal board 217 and the external relay terminal board 217 and the game display device 1 are serialized by a single signal line (communication line). It may be configured to be connected (that is, signals are transmitted in series) so that data that can be recognized by each of the various signals described above may be transmitted in a timely manner. In this case, a serial-parallel conversion IC (not shown) may be provided at appropriate locations on the main control board 271, the external relay terminal board 217, and the game display device 1.

Further, among the various signals described above, one or more signals are transmitted from the main control board 271 to the external relay terminal board 217 by a signal line (communication line) provided separately from the signal lines L1 to L8. You may do so. Specifically, for example, the above-mentioned advantageous section signal may be transmitted from the main control board 271 to the external relay terminal board 217 by a signal line (communication line) provided separately. By doing so, it is not necessary to change the configuration of the existing signal lines L1 to L8 between the pachislot game machine 2b equipped with the advantageous section and the pachislot game machine 2b not equipped with the advantageous section. The versatility of the main control board 271 or the external relay terminal board 217 can be enhanced.

In this case, the separately provided signal line (communication line) may use the parallel transmission method or the serial transmission method. For example, the existing serial port of the main control board 271 ( If the above-mentioned advantageous section signal (or data corresponding thereto) is transmitted by serial transmission using (not shown), necessary information can be transmitted without major design change. Further, in this case, the separately provided signal line (communication line) may be directly connected to the game display device 1 without passing through the external relay terminal plate 217. A signal line (communication line) different from the signal lines L1 to L7 may be provided between the external relay terminal plate 217 and the game display device 1 to have the same configuration as described above.

Further, the information based on various signals output from the main control board 271 is installed in the server device 4 or the same island via the island controller 105 connected to the game display device 1 (game device). It is transmitted to each display device for games on the island. As a result, for example, the server device 4 can grasp and manage the state of each game machine 2 (pachislot game machine 2b) installed in the game hall. Further, for example, in each display device for games on the other islands, it is possible to notify that some situation has changed in the pachislot game machines 2b installed on the same island. Further, although not shown in FIG. 44, information based on various signals output from the main control board 271 is transmitted via the island controller 105 connected to the game display device 1 (game device). , It is also transmitted to the game medium lending device 3. As a result, for example, the game medium lending device 3 can grasp and manage the state of the correspondingly installed game machines 2 (pachislot game machines 2b). However, as described above, the game display device 1, the game medium lending device 3, and the server device 4 may be connected by adopting another connection line or connection method.

<Functional flow of pachislot machine>
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the main functions in the pachislot gaming machine 2b will be described. In the pachi-slot gaming machine 2b, each means shown in FIG. 45 executes necessary processing, and the functions of each are exhibited, thereby enabling the player to execute the game.

(Input operation detection means)
The insertion operation detecting means detects an insertion operation of a game medium such as a medal or a coin by a player. When the insertion operation of a predetermined number of game media (for example, three medals) is detected, the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means described later is permitted. Further, in the symbol display means described later, a predetermined winning determination line is activated. In this example, the selector for detecting the insertion of medals by the player and the bet switch 211S for detecting the operation of the bet button 211 by the player constitute the insertion operation detecting means. The types of game media that can be detected are not limited to medals, but include coins, tokens, game balls, and electromagnetic game media having an equivalent value.

(Start operation detection means)
The start operation detecting means detects a start operation by the player. When the start operation is detected, the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display means described later is started. Further, a random number value (lottery random number value) used when the internal winning combination determining means described later determines the internal winning combination is extracted from a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535). Further, the effect random value used when the effect control means described later controls the effect content is extracted from within a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 127, 0 to 16383). In this example, the start switch 206S that detects the operation of the start lever 206 by the player constitutes the start operation detecting means. The type, number, and numerical range of the extracted random number values are not limited to this, and the number of random number values required for the game can be extracted from within a predetermined numerical range. ..

(Means for determining internal winners)
The internal winning combination determining means draws a lot based on the extracted random number value, and determines the internal winning combination from a plurality of predetermined combinations. That is, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed on the valid line is determined by the determination of the internal winning combination. In this example, the main control circuit 271 that executes the internal lottery process based on the extracted random number values with reference to various tables (FIG. 47 or FIG. 50 described later) constitutes an internal winning combination determining means. The types of symbol combinations are related to "winning" (also referred to as "establishment") in which benefits such as medal payout, replay operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player. Other so-called "losses" are provided.

Further, the pachi-slot gaming machine 2b can control the progress of the game to be stopped (the player's game operation is invalidated). Such control is referred to as "locking" (or "freezing"). For convenience, the control that stops the progress of the game executed at the start of the game is called "lock at the start of the game", and the control that stops the progress of the game executed at the end of the game is called "lock at the end of the game". Call. That is, "lock at the start of the game" means that the operation of the stop buttons 207L, 207C, and 207R is not effective for a predetermined period after the start lever 206 is operated, and the progress of the game is stopped. The "lock at the end of the game" is an operation to the bet button 211 or an operation to the start lever 206 for a predetermined period after the stop buttons 207L, 207C, and 207R are operated. Is a control that stops the progress of the game in the sense that is not effective. Of course, the trigger of "locking" is not limited to the above, and for example, after the start lever 206 is operated and any of the stop buttons 207L, 207C, and 207R is operated, for a predetermined period of time, Control may be performed so that the subsequent operation is not effective.

Here, the internal winning combination determining means can draw a lottery based on the extracted random number value and decide whether or not to perform "lock" in place of the internal winning combination or together with the internal winning combination. In this case, a plurality of random numbers are extracted, the internal winning combination is determined based on one of the random values, and whether or not to perform "lock" is determined based on the other random value. May be. That is, in the pachislot game machine 2b, in addition to determining the internal winning combination based on the extracted random number value, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform "lock" based on the extracted random number value. ing. In this case, the main control circuit 271 constitutes a lock determination means.

(Design display means)
The symbol display means variablely displays a plurality of symbols (identification information) in a plurality of columns. That is, when the start operation is detected by the start operation detecting means, the symbol variation display is started, and when the stop control is executed by the stop control means described later, the symbol variation display ends. In this example, the plurality of reels 203L, 203C, 203R, and the display windows 221L, 221C, 221R (symbol display area 221) constitute a symbol display means. The symbol display means is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a symbol image display means (for example, an image display device) that variablely displays a plurality of symbol images in a plurality of columns.

(Stop operation detection means)
The stop operation detecting means detects a stop operation by the player. When the stop operation is detected, the stop control means described later stops the symbol variation display by the symbol display means. In this example, the stop switch 207S that detects the operation of the stop buttons 207L, 207C, and 207R by the player constitutes the stop operation detecting means.

When all the reels are rotating, the first reel stop operation is the first stop operation, the stop operation performed after the first stop operation is the second stop operation, and the second stop operation is followed by the second stop operation. The stop operation performed is called a third stop operation.

(Stop control means)
The stop control means controls the stop of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display means. That is, when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the variation display of the symbol in the symbol display means is stopped based on the stop control information set according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. Control. In this example, when the stop buttons 207L, 207C, 207R are operated by the player, various stop control information is referred to, and a reel stop control process for stopping and controlling the rotation of the corresponding reels 203L, 203C, 203R is executed. The main control circuit 271 constitutes a stop control means.

Here, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from the time when each stop button is pressed. In this example, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as the "number of sliding pieces". When the specified time is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set for four symbols, and when the specified time is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set for one symbol. The maximum number of sliding pieces is not limited to these, and can be set as appropriate.

The stop control means uses the above-mentioned specified time to display the combination of symbols that is permitted to be displayed as much as possible along the effective line according to the determination result of the internal winning combination. Stop the rotation of the reel within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces.

On the other hand, depending on the decision result of the internal winning combination, for the combination of symbols that are not allowed to be displayed, the maximum sliding piece is used so that it will not be displayed along the valid line by using the above specified time. Stop the rotation of the reel within the range of the number.

Further, in the stop control means, the determined internal winning combination changes the combination of symbols displayed according to a predetermined stop operation procedure (for example, the order in which each stop button is operated). At a certain time, the rotation of the corresponding reel is controlled to be stopped with reference to the predetermined stop operation procedure.

(Winning judgment means)
The prize-winning determination means determines whether or not there is a prize (whether or not it is established) according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. That is, when the change display of the symbol is stopped by the stop control means, the winning or non-winning of the winning combination is determined based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line. In this example, the main control circuit 271 that executes the prize search process based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means constitutes the prize determination means.

(Profit-giving means)
When the winning determination means determines that there is a prize, the profit-giving means grants a profit according to the combination of the winning symbols. That is, the corresponding profit is given to the player according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. In this example, the main control circuit 271 that executes the medal payout process or the like based on the result of the prize search process constitutes a profit-giving means. Further, the profit-giving means may give the player a corresponding profit according to the determination result of the internal winning combination determining means. When the profit to be given is given by the control of the sub control circuit 272, the sub control circuit 272 constitutes the profit giving means.

Here, the profits given by the profit-giving means include the payout of medals, the operation of the re-game in which the same amount of game media as the current game is automatically inserted, and the re-game can be performed again, and the inside related to the re-game. Operation of high RT gaming state (replay time) that increases the winning probability of winning combination, activation of special gaming state (bonus gaming state) that increases winning probability of internal winning combination related to medal payout, appropriate stop for player By notifying the operation procedure, the winning probability of the combination of symbols that will pay out more medals is increased, and the winning probability of the combination of symbols that triggers the operation of the high RT gaming state is increased. The operation of the effect state (assist time) of the above can be mentioned. The profit given by the profit-giving means is not limited to this.

As described above, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, when the throwing operation detecting means detects the throwing operation of the player and the start operation detecting means detects the start operation of the player, the internal winning combination determining means internally wins the winning combination. Etc. are determined, and the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display means is started. Then, when the player's stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the stop control means controls the stop of the variation display of the symbol by the symbol display means, and the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means is the winning determination means. If it is determined that the combination of symbols is related to the winning, the profit-giving means gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols. The above-mentioned series of flows is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachislot machine 2b.

(Direction control means)
Whether the effect control means is in an appropriate effect state (for example, a normal section) based on the extracted random value for effect, other information (for example, an internal winning combination), or the establishment of a predetermined transition opportunity. The effect state control means (game section control means) that controls the effect state (game section) so that the game is performed (depending on whether it is an advantageous section) and the one to be executed this time is determined from a plurality of types of effects. It includes an effect execution content determining means to be performed, and an effect execution control means for controlling the effect execution means described later so that the determined effect is appropriately executed. In this example, the main control circuit 271 that controls the effect state (game section) constitutes the effect state control means (game section control means), and the main control circuit 271 collaborates to determine the effect content according to the control result. The control circuit 271 and the sub-control circuit 272 constitute an effect content determining means. Further, the sub-control circuit 272 that executes the effect according to the determined effect content constitutes the effect execution control means. When the effect state (game section) is controlled by the sub control circuit 272, the sub control circuit 272 may constitute the effect state control means (game section control means). Further, when the effect content is determined by either the main control circuit 271 or the sub control circuit 272, the main control circuit 271 or the sub control circuit 272 may constitute the effect content determination means. Further, when the effect execution means described later is controlled by the main control circuit 271, the main control circuit 271 may constitute the effect execution control means.

Further, the effect state control means (game section control means) and the effect content determination means provide information necessary for the game to the player when a predetermined notification condition is satisfied (for example, when the effect section is controlled in an advantageous section). (For example, information on the procedure of the stop operation and other information useful to the player) is determined. In this case, the effect control means can also be called a notification control means.

(Direction execution means)
The effect executing means executes the effect determined by the effect content determining means. That is, it means various devices used for effects such as display devices and lamps that perform visual effects, speakers that perform auditory effects, and effect buttons that perform tactile effects. In this example, the 7-segment display 213, the liquid crystal display device 205, the speakers 209L and 209R, the lamp 214, and the effect button 246 constitute the effect execution means. The effect executing means is not limited to these, and may be, for example, a movable body (accessory) provided at a position visible from the front side of the pachislot game machine 2b, or a plurality of reels (for example, a plurality of reels (for example). , Reels 203L, 203C, 203R) may be displayed in a variable manner different from the normal variable display mode of the symbol to execute the effect.

In addition, the effect execution means determines the effect for notifying the player of information necessary for the game (for example, information on the procedure of the stop operation and other information useful to the player) by the effect content determining means. If so, the player is notified of the information. In this case, the effect executing means can also be called a notification means.

[Example of the first specification of the game machine to which the game display device (game device) according to the first to ninth embodiments is connected]
Next, a first specification example of the game machine to which the game display device (game device) according to the first to ninth embodiments described above is connected will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48. In this example as well, the pachi-slot gaming machine 2b will be described as an example of the gaming machine.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a transition of the gaming state of the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example, and FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal winning combination of the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example. , FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a main control process of the pachislot machine 2b according to the first specification example.

<Transition of the gaming state of the pachislot gaming machine according to the first specification example>
First, with reference to FIG. 46, the transition of the gaming state of the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example will be described. As shown in FIG. 46, in the pachi-slot gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example, the advantageous section, which is a game section that is relatively advantageous to the player, and the advantageous section from the advantageous section, in which the player plays a game. Also includes a normal section, which is a game section that is relatively disadvantageous to the player.

The advantageous section is a relatively advantageous gaming section in the sense that the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified, and the normal section cannot be notified of the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player. In that sense, it is a relatively disadvantageous game section. For example, when the push order replay (see FIG. 47) described later is won, the stop operation procedure (stop operation order) that is the correct answer in the push order is notified if it is an advantageous section, but if it is a normal section, the push order is pushed. The procedure of the stop operation (stop operation order) that is the correct answer is not notified. Further, for example, when the push order small combination (see FIG. 47), which will be described later, is won, if it is an advantageous section, the stop operation procedure (stop operation order) that is the correct answer in the push order is notified, but it may be a normal section. For example, the procedure of the stop operation (stop operation order) that is the correct answer in the push order is not notified.

Further, as shown in FIG. 46, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example, the BB gaming state (special gaming state), which is relatively advantageous to the player, and the gaming state are relative to the player. It has a normal gaming state that is disadvantageous to. In the normal game state, the low RT game state (RT0) having the lowest probability of winning the replay role, the high RT game state (RT1) having the highest probability of winning the replay role, and the low RT winning probability of the replay role Includes a bonus internal winning (RT2) that is higher than the gaming state (RT0) and lower than the high RT gaming state (RT1). In comparison with the normal gaming states, the high RT gaming state (RT1) is the most advantageous for the player, then the bonus internal winning (RT2) is advantageous for the player, and the low RT gaming state (RT0). ) Is the most disadvantageous for the player. In the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example, the high RT gaming state (RT1) becomes the specific RT gaming state described above.

The BB game state (special game state) is relatively advantageous in the sense that the winning probability of the medal payer (small role in this example) in which the medal is paid out to the player is higher than that in the normal game state. (See FIG. 47), and the normal game state is relative in the sense that the winning probability of this medal payout combination (small role in this example) is lower than that of the BB game state (special game state). It is in a disadvantageous gaming state (see FIG. 47).

(Transition in normal section)
The player usually starts the game in the normal game state in the normal section. More specifically, the game is started from the low RT game state (RT0). As described above, in the normal section, since the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, the probability of transitioning from the low RT gaming state (RT0) to the high RT gaming state (RT1) is low, but the push order replay If the push order is accidentally correct at the time of winning and the ascending replay described later is established, the state shifts from the low RT gaming state (RT0) to the high RT gaming state (RT1). However, it is difficult to accidentally continue to answer the push order correctly, and when the push order replay is won, the push order is incorrect and the descending replay described later is established, or when the push order small role is won, the push order is incorrect. If the pressing position is incorrect and the descending symbol described later is established, the state shifts from the high RT gaming state (RT1) to the low RT gaming state (RT0).

In addition, in the normal gaming state (low RT gaming state (RT0) or high RT gaming state (RT1)), if the BB (special role) described later is won, the bonus internal winning (RT2) is entered (BB). Winning). The BB is a bonus combination, and is retained as an internal winning combination (that is, at the end of the unit game) from the time when the BB is won until the combination of the BB symbols is stopped and displayed on the valid line (BB is established). It is not cleared). This is called "carry-over", and such a bonus role is also called "carry-over".

Then, when the combination of BB symbols is stopped and displayed on the valid line during the bonus internal winning (RT2), the normal gaming state (bonus internal winning (RT2)) is shifted to the BB gaming state (special gaming state). Here, in FIG. 46, the bonus internal winning (RT2) is referred to as a “waiting section”. This means that when the advantageous section start condition (for example, advantageous section start condition B described later) is satisfied in connection with the bonus winning, the section from the bonus winning to the bonus establishment is started as the advantageous section. This is because it is identified as a waiting section (that is, a waiting section). Therefore, strictly speaking, the bonus internal winning (RT2) in the normal section is not a waiting section (in the sense of waiting for the start of the advantageous section), but for convenience, it is referred to as a "waiting section". There is.

Further, in the BB game state (special game state), when the number of medals exceeding the predetermined number of medals to be paid out is paid out, the BB game state ends (BB end), and the BB game state changes to the normal game state. (More specifically, it shifts to the low RT gaming state (RT0)). In this example, the predetermined number of medals to be paid out is set to "240".

Further, in the normal gaming state (low RT gaming state (RT0) or high RT gaming state (RT1)), when the special small winning combination 1 described later is won, the advantageous section start condition is satisfied (advantageous section start condition A is satisfied). , It is notified that the section display area (section indicator) lights up at any timing until the start of the next unit game to shift to the advantageous section, and the normal game state (low RT) of the advantageous section from the next unit game. It shifts to the gaming state (RT0) or the high RT gaming state (RT1)). For example, in the low RT gaming state (RT0) of the normal section, when the special small winning combination 1 described later is won, the low RT gaming state (RT0) of the advantageous section is set from the next unit game.

Further, in the normal gaming state (low RT gaming state (RT0) or high RT gaming state (RT1)), the special small winning combination 1 + BB described later is won (that is, the special small winning combination 1 and BB are duplicately won), and described later. When the single BB is elected (that is, only the BB is elected independently), the advantageous section start condition is satisfied (advantageous section start condition B is satisfied), and after the above-mentioned waiting section (during bonus internal winning (RT2)), it is advantageous. It shifts to the BB game state (special game state) of the section. In this case, in the pachi-slot game machine 2b according to the first specification example, the waiting section may be identified as a part of the advantageous section, and the combination of BB symbols is effective in the waiting section. It may be identified as the advantageous section starts when the stop is displayed on the line. That is, the section display area (section indicator) lights up at an arbitrary timing from the establishment of the advantageous section start condition (in this case, the advantageous section start condition B) to the stop display of the combination of BB symbols on the valid line. The section display area (section indicator) lights up when the combination of BB symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line and the section shifts to the advantageous section. It may be notified that the shift to the advantageous section is performed.

(Transition in advantageous section)
The advantageous section is composed of a normal gaming state and a BB gaming state (special gaming state) of the advantageous section (as described above, when the waiting section is also included in the advantageous section, the waiting section is also included). In the advantageous section, regardless of whether the advantageous section is in the normal gaming state or the BB gaming state (special gaming state), a predetermined number of games (game period) are played after the advantageous section starts. It ends when it is broken (the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied). In this example, the advantageous section ends when "1500" games are played.

When the advantageous section start condition A is satisfied from the low RT gaming state (RT0) of the normal section and the transition is made to the advantageous section, the transition is made to the low RT gaming state (RT0) of the advantageous section, and the high RT gaming state of the normal section is also established. When the advantageous section start condition A is satisfied from (RT1) and the section shifts to the advantageous section, the state shifts to the high RT gaming state (RT1) of the advantageous section. Here, as described above, in the advantageous section, the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, so as long as the stop operation is performed according to the notification, the push order replay is correct when the push order replay is won. When the ascending replay described later is established and the low RT gaming state (RT0) is established, the transition from the low RT gaming state (RT0) to the high RT gaming state (RT1) is established. Further, in the case of the high RT gaming state (RT1), the high RT gaming state (RT1) is maintained. In addition, when the push order small win is won, the push order is correct and the specific small win described later is established, and the most medals are paid out to the player.

Further, when the advantageous section start condition B is satisfied in the low RT gaming state (RT0) or the high RT gaming state (RT1) of the normal section, the BB gaming state (special gaming state) as the advantageous section is passed through the above-mentioned waiting section. ). Since "BB winning", "BB establishment", and "BB end" in the advantageous section are the same as those in the normal section, the description thereof will be omitted. In the normal gaming state (low RT gaming state (RT0) or high RT gaming state (RT1)) of the advantageous section, the waiting section in the case of "BB winning" is identified so as to be included in the advantageous section. , The number of games during that period may be counted as the number of games that is subject to whether or not the advantageous section end condition is satisfied, or the games are identified so as not to be included in the advantageous section, and the games during that period are played. The number of times may not be counted as the number of games that is subject to whether or not the advantageous section end condition is satisfied.

Further, in the normal gaming state of the advantageous section (low RT gaming state (RT0) or high RT gaming state (RT1)), when the cumulative number of games of the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number of games (1500 times) (the advantageous section ends). (Conditions are satisfied), the advantageous section ends, and the normal section shifts to the normal gaming state (low RT gaming state (RT0) or high RT gaming state (RT1)). Further, in the BB game state (special game state) of the advantageous section, when the cumulative number of games of the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number of games (1500 times) (the advantageous section end condition is satisfied), the advantageous section ends and the normal section ends. BB game state (special game state).

In this example, when the advantageous section start condition (advantageous section start condition A and advantageous section start condition B) is satisfied, the cumulative number of games in the advantageous section is set to a predetermined number of games (1500 times). The advantageous section continues until it becomes, but the conditions for ending the advantageous section are not limited to this. For example, it is adopted as a condition for ending the advantageous section that the net increase in the number of medals (that is, the difference number) obtained by subtracting the number of medals inserted from the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section becomes a predetermined number (for example, 2000). Alternatively, the number of times the stop operation procedure is notified (that is, the number of times of notification) becomes a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times) at the time of push order replay and / or push order small winning combination winning. May be adopted as the end condition of the advantageous section. Further, when the advantageous section starts, an initial value (for example, 100 times) is given as the game period of the advantageous section, and the above-mentioned advantageous section start condition (advantageous section start condition A and / or) is given during the advantageous section. When the advantageous section start condition B) is further satisfied, the game period of the advantageous section may be extended (the number of games is added).

Further, in this example, during the BB game state (special game state), as will be described later, each game BB small and medium-sized combination is established regardless of the procedure of the player's stop operation, but the BB game state (special game state) The composition of the internal winning combination in the gaming state) is not limited to this. For example, even in the BB game state (special game state), the push order small winning combination (which may be a pushing order small winning combination different from the pushing order small winning combination 1 to 6 described later) is determined as the internal winning combination with a predetermined probability. It may be configured to be. In this way, during the BB game state (special game state) in the normal section, the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, so that the number of medals that the player can obtain is inevitably reduced. However, during the BB game state (special game state) in the advantageous section, the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, so that the number of medals that the player can obtain inevitably increases. Therefore, it is possible to configure the advantageous section as a more advantageous game section.

<Structure of internal winning combination of pachislot machine according to the first specification example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the configuration of the internal winning combination of the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example will be described. Note that FIG. 47 shows an internal lottery table used for determining an internal winning combination in the internal lottery process (see S214-1 in FIG. 48), which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 47, the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example has a normal replay, a push order replay 1 to 6, a normal small win, a push order small win 1 to 6, and a special small win 1 as internal winning combinations. , Special small role 2, BB small and medium-sized role, special small role 1 + BB, special small role 2 + BB, and single BB. In FIG. 47, a specific set value (for example, a set value “1”) is set in the pachislot game machine 2b according to the first specification example, and “3” medals are inserted in the normal game state. It shows an internal lottery table that is referred to when or when "2" medals are inserted in the BB game state.

Here, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example (the same applies to the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example described later; hereinafter, simply referred to as "pachislot gaming machine 2b"), the inside of the housing By operating a setting switch (not shown) provided by a clerk at the amusement machine, a setting value of one of a plurality of stages (for example, any of the six stages of the setting values "1" to "6") can be set. It is possible to set. Further, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, it is possible to change the lottery value of a part or all of the internal winning combinations according to the set value. This makes it possible to change the degree of advantage of the player according to the operation of the clerk of the game hall (the operation of setting the set value). In general, the lottery value of the internal lottery table is set so that the lower the set value, the lower the degree of advantage of the player, and the higher the set value, the higher the degree of advantage of the player.

Further, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the number of medals to be inserted that can start the game is predetermined for each game state, and a plurality of medals that can start the game are predetermined. If so, it is possible to change the lottery value of some or all of the internal winning medals according to the number of inserted medals. This makes it possible to change the degree of advantage of the player according to the operation (insertion operation) of the player. In general, the lottery value of the internal lottery table is set so that the smaller the number of input sheets, the lower the degree of advantage of the player, and the larger the number of input sheets, the higher the degree of advantage of the player. In the pachislot gaming machine 2b of the first specification example, "1", "2", and "3" are defined as the number of medals to be inserted that can start the game in the normal gaming state. , In the BB game state, "2" is set as the number of medals to be inserted so that the game can be started. On the other hand, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b of the second specification example described later, "3" is set as the number of medals to be inserted so that the game can be started in the normal gaming state and the MB gaming state described later. It is said. However, the number of medals that can start the game is not limited to this.

In FIG. 47 (the same applies to FIG. 50 described later), the correct push order is the push order predetermined as a more appropriate push order (that is, the stop operation order of the player) for the internal winning combination. It means that the stop operation is performed in the same push order, and the incorrect push order answer means that the stop operation is performed in a push order different from the push order that is the correct answer in the push order.

The pressing order correct answer (123) is that the pressing order determined in advance as a more appropriate pressing order is the first stop operation of the stop button 207L, the second stop operation of the stop button 207C, and the second stop operation of the stop button 207R. 3 It means that it is a stop operation.

Further, the correct push order (132) is a push order predetermined as a more appropriate push order, in which the stop button 207L is first stopped, the stop button 207R is second stopped, and the stop button 207C is second. 3 It means that it is a stop operation.

Further, the correct push order (213) means that the push order determined in advance as a more appropriate push order is that the stop button 207C is first stopped, the stop button 207L is second stopped, and the stop button 207R is second. 3 It means that it is a stop operation.

Further, the correct push order (231) is a push order predetermined as a more appropriate push order, in which the stop button 207C is first stopped, the stop button 207R is second stopped, and the stop button 207L is second. 3 It means that it is a stop operation.

Further, the correct push order (312) is a push order predetermined as a more appropriate push order, in which the stop button 207R is first stopped, the stop button 207L is second stopped, and the stop button 207C is second. 3 It means that it is a stop operation.

Further, the correct push order (321) is a push order predetermined as a more appropriate push order, in which the stop button 207R is first stopped, the stop button 207C is second stopped, and the stop button 207L is second. 3 It means that it is a stop operation.

In the normal replay, the lottery value "4490" is defined in the low RT gaming state (RT0), and 4490/65536 ("65536" is the total number of possible values of the lottery random values 0 to 65535. The same shall apply hereinafter). Win with a probability. Further, in the high RT gaming state (RT1), the lottery value "35977" is defined, and the player wins with a probability of 35977/65536. The lottery value varies depending on the set value. Specifically, the lottery value of the normal small winning combination, which will be described later, increases (the numerical value increases) as the set value increases, and decreases (the numerical value decreases). In addition, the lottery value "35977" is defined during the bonus internal winning (RT2), and the winning is performed with a probability of 35977/65536. Further, in the BB game state, the lottery value "0" is defined, and the player is not won in the BB game state.

When the normal replay is won, the combination of the symbols of the normal replay is stopped and displayed on the valid line regardless of the pushing order and the pressing position (that is, the timing when the player performs the stop operation) (regardless of the pushing order and the pressing position). (Normally replay is established). It should be noted that each symbol constituting the combination of symbols of the normal replay is appropriately arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R so that such stop control can be performed.

In each of the push order replays 1 to 6, the lottery value "748" is defined in the low RT gaming state (RT0), and the push order replays 1 to 6 are won with a probability of 748/65536. Further, in the high RT gaming state (RT1), the lottery value "3567" is defined, and the player wins with a probability of 3567/65536. In addition, the lottery value "0" is defined during the bonus internal winning (RT2) and the BB game state, and the player is not won during the bonus internal winning (RT2) and the BB game state.

If the push order replay 1 is won and the stop operation is performed with the push order correct answer (123), the combination of the symbols of the ascending replay is stopped and displayed on the valid line (regardless of the pressing position) (ascending replay). Established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with an incorrect push order, the combination of the symbols of the descending replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descending replay is established).

If the push order replay 2 is won and the stop operation is performed with the push order correct answer (132), the combination of the symbols of the ascending replay is stopped and displayed on the valid line (regardless of the pressing position) (ascending replay). Established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with an incorrect push order, the combination of the symbols of the descending replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descending replay is established).

If the push order replay 3 is won and the stop operation is performed with the correct push order answer (213), the combination of the symbols of the ascending replay is stopped and displayed on the valid line (ascending replay). Established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with an incorrect push order, the combination of the symbols of the descending replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descending replay is established).

If the push order replay 4 is won and the stop operation is performed with the correct push order answer (231), the combination of the symbols of the ascending replay is stopped and displayed on the valid line (ascending replay). Established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with an incorrect push order, the combination of the symbols of the descending replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descending replay is established).

If the push order replay 5 is won, and if the stop operation is performed with the correct push order answer (312), the combination of the symbols of the ascending replay (regardless of the pressing position) is stopped and displayed on the valid line (ascending replay). Established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with an incorrect push order, the combination of the symbols of the descending replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descending replay is established).

If the push order replay 6 is won and the stop operation is performed with the correct push order answer (321), the combination of the symbols of the ascending replay is stopped and displayed on the valid line (regardless of the pressing position) (ascending replay). Established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with an incorrect push order, the combination of the symbols of the descending replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descending replay is established).

In this way, if any of the push order replays 1 to 6 is won, and if the stop operation is performed in the push order that is the correct push order, the combination of the symbols of the ascending replay is stopped and displayed on the valid line. As a result, if it is in the low RT gaming state (RT0), it shifts (rises) to the high RT gaming state (RT1), and if it is in the high RT gaming state (RT1), the high RT gaming state (RT1) is maintained. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed in the push order in which the push order is incorrect, the combination of the symbols of the descending replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line, so that it is low in the high RT gaming state (RT1). It shifts (descends) to the RT gaming state (RT0), and if it is in the low RT gaming state (RT0), the low RT gaming state (RT0) is maintained. Each symbol constituting the combination of the ascending replay and descending replay symbols is appropriately arranged on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 203L, 203C, and 203R so that such stop control can be performed.

For normal small wins, a lottery value "1284" is defined in the normal game state (low RT game state (RT0), high RT game state (RT1), and bonus internal winning (RT2)), and the probability is 1284/65536. Win with. The lottery value varies depending on the set value. Specifically, it is defined that the lottery value increases as the set value increases (for example, the lottery value is added by "4" every time the set value is added by 1). Further, in the BB game state, the lottery value "0" is defined, and the player is not won in the BB game state. Here, in this example, for the normal replay and the normal small winning combination, the lottery value (in other words, the winning probability) changes according to the set value, and for the other internal winning combination, according to the set value. The lottery value does not fluctuate, but it is not limited to this. For other internal winners, the lottery value may be changed according to the set value. However, from the viewpoint of ensuring the soundness of the game, it is advantageous to have an internal winning combination (for example, special small combination 1, special small combination 1 + BB, and single BB described later) for deciding whether or not to shift to an advantageous section. For the internal winning combination (for example, push order replays 1 to 6 and push order small combination 1 to 6) for which the procedure of the stop operation is notified in the section, the lottery value should not be changed according to the set value. Is desirable.

If you win a normal small winning combination, regardless of the pushing order or pressing position (regardless of pushing order or pressing position), the combination of symbols of the normal small winning combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line (normal small winning combination is established), and 8 cards are displayed. The medal will be paid out. It should be noted that each symbol constituting the combination of symbols of the normal small combination is appropriately arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R so that such stop control can be performed.

The lottery value "1000" is defined for each of the push order small wins 1 to 6 in the normal game state (low RT game state (RT0), high RT game state (RT1), and bonus internal winning (RT2)). , 1000/65536 to win. Further, in the BB game state, the lottery value "0" is defined, and the player is not won in the BB game state.

If the push order small winning combination 1 is won and the stop operation is performed with the pushing order correct answer (123), the combination of the symbols of the specific small winning combination is stopped and displayed on the valid line (specification). (Small role established), 9 medals will be paid out. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with an incorrect push order answer, if the stop operation timing is appropriate (press position correct answer), the combination of special small winning symbols is stopped and displayed on the valid line ( (Special small winning combination established), one medal is paid out, but if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (pressing position incorrect answer), the combination of the symbols of the descending symbol is stopped and displayed on the valid line (descending). Design establishment). Here, the combination of the symbols of the descending symbols is a combination of some predetermined symbols among the combinations of the symbols that are lost, and the medal is not paid out. That is, when the answer is incorrect in the pressing order and the answer is incorrect in the pressing position, "missing" of the specific small winning combination and the special small winning combination occurs.

If the push order small winning combination 2 is won and the stop operation is performed with the pushing order correct answer (132), the combination of the symbols of the specific small winning combination is stopped and displayed on the valid line (specification). (Small role established), 9 medals will be paid out. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with an incorrect push order answer, if the stop operation timing is appropriate (press position correct answer), the combination of special small winning symbols is stopped and displayed on the valid line ( (Special small winning combination established), one medal is paid out, but if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (pressing position incorrect answer), the combination of the symbols of the descending symbol is stopped and displayed on the valid line (descending). Design establishment).

If the push order small winning combination 3 is won, and if the stop operation is performed with the pushing order correct answer (213), the combination of the symbols of the specific small winning combination is stopped and displayed on the valid line (specification). (Small role established), 9 medals will be paid out. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with an incorrect push order answer, if the stop operation timing is appropriate (press position correct answer), the combination of special small winning symbols is stopped and displayed on the valid line ( (Special small winning combination established), one medal is paid out, but if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (pressing position incorrect answer), the combination of the symbols of the descending symbol is stopped and displayed on the valid line (descending). Design establishment).

If the push order small winning combination 4 is won, and if the stop operation is performed with the pushing order correct answer (231), the combination of the symbols of the specific small winning combination is stopped and displayed on the valid line (specification). (Small role established), 9 medals will be paid out. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with an incorrect push order answer, if the stop operation timing is appropriate (press position correct answer), the combination of special small winning symbols is stopped and displayed on the valid line ( (Special small winning combination established), one medal is paid out, but if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (pressing position incorrect answer), the combination of the symbols of the descending symbol is stopped and displayed on the valid line (descending). Design establishment).

If the push order small winning combination 5 is won, and if the stop operation is performed with the correct push order answer (312), the combination of the symbols of the specific small winning combination is stopped and displayed on the valid line (specification). (Small role established), 9 medals will be paid out. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with an incorrect push order answer, if the stop operation timing is appropriate (press position correct answer), the combination of special small winning symbols is stopped and displayed on the valid line ( (Special small winning combination established), one medal is paid out, but if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (pressing position incorrect answer), the combination of the symbols of the descending symbol is stopped and displayed on the valid line (descending). Design establishment).

If the push order small winning combination 6 is won, and if the stop operation is performed with the correct push order answer (321), the combination of the symbols of the specific small winning combination is stopped and displayed on the valid line (specification). (Small role established), 9 medals will be paid out. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with an incorrect push order answer, if the stop operation timing is appropriate (press position correct answer), the combination of special small winning symbols is stopped and displayed on the valid line ( (Special small winning combination established), one medal is paid out, but if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (pressing position incorrect answer), the combination of the symbols of the descending symbol is stopped and displayed on the valid line (descending). Design establishment).

In this way, if any of the push order small winning combination 1 to 6 is won, and if the stop operation is performed in the pushing order that is the correct answer in the pushing order, the combination of the symbols of the specific small winning combination stops on the effective line. By displaying, nine medals are paid out, and if it is in the high RT gaming state (RT1), the high RT gaming state (RT1) is maintained. On the other hand, if the stop operation is performed in the push order that is the wrong answer in the push order, or if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the push position is the correct answer, the combination of the symbols of the special small winning combination is stopped and displayed on the valid line. By doing so, only one medal is paid out, but if it is in the high RT gaming state (RT1), the high RT gaming state (RT1) is maintained, but the stop operation is performed at the timing when the pressing position becomes incorrect. If it is broken, the combination of the descending symbols will be stopped and displayed on the effective line, so that the medal will not be paid out, and if it is in the high RT gaming state (RT1), it will shift to the low RT gaming state (RT0) (RT0). It will go down). Each symbol constituting the combination of the specific small combination, the special small combination, and the design of the descending symbol is appropriately arranged on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 203L, 203C, and 203R so that such stop control can be performed.

The special small winning combination 1 has a lottery value of "8" defined in the low RT gaming state (RT0) and the high RT gaming state (RT1), and is won with a probability of 8/65536. In addition, the lottery value "16" is defined during the bonus internal winning (RT2), and the winning is performed with a probability of 16/65536. Further, in the BB game state, the lottery value "0" is defined, and the player is not won in the BB game state. The difference in the lottery value between the low RT gaming state (RT0) and the high RT gaming state (RT1) and the bonus internal winning (RT2) is that the bonus role is repeated during the bonus internal winning (RT2). This is because the lottery value “8” of the special small winning combination 1 that was originally supposed to be won at the winning number 18 is added at the winning number 15 (see FIG. 47). Therefore, in each gaming state (RT0 to RT2) in the normal gaming state, the winning probability of the special small winning combination 1 is substantially constant.

When the special small winning combination 1 is won, the combination of the symbols of the special small winning combination 1 is stopped and displayed on the valid line regardless of the pressing order or pressing position (regardless of the pressing order or pressing position) (special small winning combination 1 is established). Three medals will be paid out. The symbols constituting the combination of the symbols of the special small winning combination 1 are appropriately arranged on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 203L, 203C, and 203R so that such stop control can be performed. Further, as described above, if the special small winning combination 1 is won in the normal section, the advantageous section start condition (advantageous section start condition A) is satisfied, and the section shifts to the advantageous section.

The special small winning combination 2 has a lottery value of "609" defined in the low RT gaming state (RT0) and the high RT gaming state (RT1), and is won with a probability of 609/65536. In addition, the lottery value "841" is defined during the bonus internal winning (RT2), and the winning is performed with a probability of 841/65536. Further, in the BB game state, the lottery value "0" is defined, and the player is not won in the BB game state. The lottery value differs between the low RT gaming state (RT0) and the high RT gaming state (RT1) and the bonus internal winning (RT2), as in the special small winning combination 1 described above, in the winning number 19. This is because the lottery value "232" of the special small winning combination 2 that was originally supposed to be won is added to the winning number 16 (see FIG. 47). Therefore, in each gaming state (RT0 to RT2) in the normal gaming state, the winning probability of the special small winning combination 2 is substantially constant.

When the special small winning combination 2 is won, the combination of the symbols of the special small winning combination 2 is stopped and displayed on the valid line regardless of the pressing order or pressing position (regardless of the pressing order or pressing position) (special small winning combination 2 is established). Three medals will be paid out. The symbols constituting the combination of the symbols of the special small winning combination 2 are appropriately arranged on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 203L, 203C, and 203R so that such stop control can be performed.

The lottery value "0" is defined for the BB small and medium-sized role in the normal game state (low RT game state (RT0), high RT game state (RT1), and bonus internal winning (RT2)), and the BB small and medium-sized role is won in the normal game state. do not do. Further, in the BB game state, the lottery value "65536" is defined, and the winner is (that is, always) with a probability of 65536 / 65536.

When the BB small and medium-sized combination is won, the combination of the symbols of the BB small and medium-sized combination is stopped and displayed on the valid line regardless of the pressing order and pressing position (regardless of the pressing order or pressing position) (BB small and medium-sized combination is established), and 10 cards The medal will be paid out. The symbols constituting the combination of the symbols of the BB small and medium-sized combinations are appropriately arranged on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 203L, 203C, and 203R so that such stop control can be performed.

The special small winning combination 1 + BB has a lottery value of "8" defined in the low RT gaming state (RT0) and the high RT gaming state (RT1), and is won with a probability of 8/65536. In addition, the lottery value "0" is defined during the bonus internal winning (RT2) and the BB game state, and the player is not won during the bonus internal winning (RT2) and the BB game state.

When the special small winning combination 1 + BB is won, the combination of the symbols of the special small winning combination 1 is stopped and displayed on the valid line regardless of the pressing order or pressing position (regardless of the pressing order or pressing position) (special small winning combination 1 is established). Three medals will be paid out, and BB will be carried over to the next game as a carry-over role. In the pachislot gaming machine 2b, if a small winning combination (for example, special small winning combination 1) and a bonus winning combination (for example, BB) are won in duplicate, the small winning combination is preferentially stopped over the bonus winning combination. Stop control is performed so that it is displayed. Similarly, when the replay combination (for example, normal replay) and the bonus combination (for example, BB) are won in duplicate, the replay combination is stopped so as to be preferentially stopped and displayed over the bonus combination. Control is done. Further, as described above, if the special small winning combination 1 + BB is won in the normal section, the advantageous section start condition (advantageous section start condition B) is satisfied, and the section shifts to the advantageous section after passing through the waiting section.

The special small winning combination 2 + BB has a lottery value of "232" defined in the low RT gaming state (RT0) and the high RT gaming state (RT1), and is won with a probability of 232/65536. In addition, the lottery value "0" is defined during the bonus internal winning (RT2) and the BB game state, and the player is not won during the bonus internal winning (RT2) and the BB game state.

When the special small winning combination 2 + BB is won, the combination of the symbols of the special small winning combination 2 is stopped and displayed on the valid line regardless of the pressing order or pressing position (regardless of the pressing order or pressing position) (special small winning combination 2 is established). Three medals will be paid out, and BB will be carried over to the next game as a carry-over role (bonus internal winning (carry-over)).

In the single BB, the lottery value "16" is defined in the low RT gaming state (RT0) and the high RT gaming state (RT1), and the single BB is won with a probability of 16/65536. In addition, the lottery value "0" is defined during the bonus internal winning (RT2) and the BB game state, and the player is not won during the bonus internal winning (RT2) and the BB game state.

When a single BB is won, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the pressing position is correct, the combination of BB symbols is stopped and displayed on the valid line (BB is established), and no medal is paid out, but next time. It shifts from the game to the BB game state. On the other hand, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the pressing position is incorrect, the combination of BB symbols is not displayed as a stop on the valid line, and the BB is carried over to the next game as a carry-over role (bonus internal winning (bonus internal winning (bonus internal winning)). Carryover)). This also applies to games in which BB is carried over as a carry-over role. Each symbol constituting the combination of symbols of BB is appropriately arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R so that such stop control can be performed.

<Main control processing of pachislot machine according to the first specification example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the main control process of the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example will be described. The main control process shown in FIG. 48 is executed by the main CPU 231.

First, when the power of the pachislot gaming machine 2b is turned on, the main CPU 231 executes the power-on processing (S210). In this power-on processing, it is determined whether the backup data backed up when the power is turned off is normal, whether the set value has been changed (setting change), etc., and the initialization process is executed according to the judgment result. .. For example, when the backup data is normal and the settings have not been changed, the main CPU 231 returns the pachislot game machine 2b to the state when the power is turned off. If the backup data is normal and the settings are changed, all the storage areas are initialized as a process when the settings are changed. If the backup data is not normal, the progress of the game is waited (disabled) until a new setting change is made.

Although not shown, in step S210, the main CPU 231 generates initialization command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 271 to the sub control circuit 272, and the generated initialization command data is assigned to the main RAM 233 for communication. Store in the data storage area. That is, the main CPU 231 performs a process of generating and storing an initialization command. The initialization command is, for example, a command for enabling the sub CPU 281 to recognize information such as whether or not the set value has been changed and the set value.

Here, the initialization command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub CPU 281 in a timer interrupt process (periodic interrupt process) (not shown) executed by the main CPU 231. The same applies to the various commands described below. However, the mode of command transmission is not limited to this. For example, the interrupt process may be generated when the data is stored in the communication data storage area, and the stored command data may be transmitted to the sub CPU 281.

Next, the main CPU 231 executes the initialization process at the end of one game (one unit game) (S211). In this initialization process, a storage area designated in advance to be initialized at the end of one game is initialized. For example, a process of clearing the data stored in the area for storing the data indicating the internal winning combination of the main RAM 233, the area for storing the data indicating the combination of the displayed symbols (display combination), or the like is executed.

Next, the main CPU 231 executes the medal acceptance / start check process (S212). In this medal reception / start check process, when the number of medals inserted by the player is detected and the number of inserted medals is such that the game can be started, or when there is an automatic insertion request described later. Allows detection of the player's start operation. Specifically, the main CPU 231 controls the start switch 206S so that the start operation can be detected. Then, when the start operation is performed, the main CPU 231 prohibits the acceptance of medals and shifts the process to S213.

Although not shown, in step S212, the main CPU 231 generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 271 to the sub control circuit 272, and the generated medal insertion command data is assigned to the main RAM 233 for communication. Store in the data storage area. That is, the main CPU 231 performs a process of generating and storing a medal insertion command. Here, the medal insertion command is a command for enabling the sub CPU 281 to recognize information such as the presence / absence of medal insertion, the value of the number of inserted medals, and the value of the number of credits.

Next, the main CPU 231 extracts a necessary random number value and stores it in the random number value storage area allocated to the main RAM 233 (S213). In this example, at least a random number value (lottery random number value) used in the internal lottery process described later is extracted from 0 to 65535 and stored.

Next, the main CPU 231 executes the internal lottery process (S214-1). In this internal lottery process, an internal lottery table is set according to the game state and the number of input sheets, and the lottery value defined for each winning number is sequentially subtracted from the stored random number value (lottery random number value). Processing is done. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a negative value, the internal winning combination corresponding to the winning number at the time of the negative value is determined as the internal winning combination in this game. On the other hand, if the subtraction result does not become a negative value even if the lottery values specified for all the winning numbers are subtracted, the loss is determined as the internal winning combination in this game. If the BB is carried over, the BB is combined with the internal winning combination determined as the above-mentioned processing result, and the internal winning combination is determined.

Next, the main CPU 231 executes the advantageous section control process at the start of the game (S215-1). In this game start advantageous section control process, if the current game section is an advantageous section, the number of games in the advantageous section is counted (adding "1" for each game), and the counting result determines the advantageous section end condition. When it is established (when the number of games played in the advantageous section becomes "1500"), the process for ending the advantageous section is performed. Further, if the current game section is a normal section, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section start condition (advantageous section start condition A or advantageous section start condition B) is satisfied based on the determined internal winning combination. When it is determined that the advantageous section start condition is satisfied, the process for starting the advantageous section from the next game (or after the waiting section has elapsed) is performed.

Although not shown, in step S215-1, the main CPU 231 generates an effect state command for transmission from the main control circuit 271 to the sub control circuit 272, and allocates the generated effect state command data to the main RAM 233. Store in the communication data storage area. That is, the main CPU 231 performs a process of generating and storing the effect state command. Here, the effect state command is, for example, the type of the current game section, the counting result of the number of games in the advantageous section when the current game section is an advantageous section, and the case where the current game section is an advantageous section. This is a command for making information such as instruction information based on the determined internal winning combination recognizable by the sub CPU 281.

Further, the "instruction information" is information for causing the sub CPU 281 to recognize the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player according to the internal winning combination. In the pachislot gaming machine 2b of this example, whether the gaming section is a normal section or an advantageous section is managed by the control of the main CPU 231 and whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation in the advantageous section is determined by the main CPU 231. It is managed by control.

Therefore, when the current game section is an advantageous section, the main CPU 231 transmits an effect state command including instruction information to the sub CPU 281, so that the sub CPU 281 side presses the correct answer according to the internal winning combination ( (See FIG. 47), the stop operation sequence is recognizable so that the stop operation notification effect for notifying the appropriate stop operation procedure can be executed, for example, by the display mode on the liquid crystal display device 205. When the game section of is a normal section, by transmitting an effect state command that does not include instruction information to the sub CPU 281, the sub CPU 281 side obtains a correct push order according to the internal winning combination (see FIG. 47). The stop operation order is made unrecognizable so that the above-mentioned stop operation notification effect cannot be executed. As a result, even if some kind of fraudulent activity is performed on the sub control circuit 272 side or an abnormality occurs, the main control circuit 271 side can appropriately manage the advantageous section.

For example, when the current game section is an advantageous section and the push order replay 1 or the push order small winning combination 1 is won, the main CPU 231 transmits "1" as instruction information indicating the push order correct answer (123) and pushes. If you win the forward replay 2 or the push order small win 2, "2" is sent as instruction information indicating the push order correct answer (132), and if you win the push order replay 3 or the push order small win 3, the push order correct answer (132). When "3" is transmitted as the instruction information indicating (213) and the push order replay 4 or the push order small winning combination 4 is won, "4" is transmitted as the instruction information indicating the push order correct answer (231) and the push order is received. If the replay 5 or the push order small winning combination 5 is won, "5" is transmitted as instruction information indicating the pushing order correct answer (312), and if the pushing order replay 6 or the pushing order small winning combination 6 is won, the pushing order correct answer (312) is sent. "6" is transmitted as instruction information indicating 321).

The mode of the instruction information is not limited to that described above, and can be appropriately set. That is, the information may be such that the sub CPU 281 can recognize which stop operation procedure is advantageous for the player. Further, the mode of transmitting instruction information is not limited to that described above. For example, in the case of an advantageous section, it is possible to transmit the effect state command including the instruction information, while in the case of the normal section, it is possible not to transmit the effect state command. Further, for example, in the case of an advantageous section, an effect state command including instruction information is transmitted, while in the case of a normal section, the type of combination (that is, a replay combination, a small combination, or a bonus combination). It is also possible to send an effect status command that includes winning type information that recognizes only (?).

Further, the instruction information may not only be transmitted to the sub CPU 281 side, but may be directly notified by the control of the main CPU 231. Specifically, for example, in the 7-segment display 213, an instruction information display area for displaying instruction information may be configured, and the above-mentioned instruction information may be digitally displayed to the player. Further, the instruction information display area may be provided at an arbitrary position on the front door 202 separately from the 7-segment display 213. In this case, this instruction information display area is separately configured as an instruction information display. Further, in this case, the instruction information display may use another light source (for example, LED or the like) without using the 7-segment display.

Next, the main CPU 231 executes the reel stop initial setting process (S216). In this reel stop initial setting process, various stop control information of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R described above is stored in the corresponding area of the main RAM 233 based on the result of the internal lottery process (internal winning combination).

Next, the main CPU 231 generates start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 271 to the sub control circuit 272, and stores the generated start command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 233 (S217). That is, the main CPU 231 performs a process of generating and storing a start command. The start command is, for example, the type of the internal winning combination, the type of the game state, the presence or absence of lock execution and its contents, the bonus game state (for example, the BB game state in the first specification example, the MB game state in the second specification example described later). ), And information such as the cumulative number of medals paid out in the advantageous section and the cumulative number of medals paid out in the advantageous section can be recognized by the sub CPU 281.

Next, the main CPU 231 executes the lock execution process at the start of the game (S218). In this game start lock execution process, control is executed to invalidate the player's game operation (for example, stop operation) for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of various lock execution conditions.

Next, the main CPU 231 executes the wait process (S219). In this wait process, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the previous game (the start of the previous unit game), and if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the predetermined time has elapsed. The waiting time to wait until is exhausted. The predetermined time in this wait process, that is, the wait time is set to, for example, 4.1 seconds from the start of the previous unit game.

Next, the main CPU 231 executes the reel rotation start process (S220). In this reel rotation start process, a process for requesting the start of rotation of all reels 203L, 203C, 203R is executed. Controls such as reel rotation start, rotation maintenance, and rotation stop are executed in a timer interrupt process (not shown) executed by the main CPU 231.

In this timer interrupt process, the drive of the stepping motors 249L, 249C, 249R is controlled to start the rotation of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R, and the rotation of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R is at a constant speed (for example, 80). Accelerate until rotation / minute) is reached. After that, when the rotation of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R reaches a constant speed, this constant speed rotation is maintained. When the rotation of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R reaches a constant speed and the reel index described above is detected, the stop operation to the stop buttons 207L, 207C, 207R is permitted.

Although not shown, in step S220, the main CPU 231 generates reel rotation start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 271 to the sub control circuit 272, and the generated reel rotation start command data is assigned to the main RAM 233. Store in the communication data storage area. That is, the main CPU 231 performs a process of generating and storing the reel rotation start command. The reel rotation start command is, for example, a command for making it possible for the sub CPU 281 to recognize that the rotation of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R has started.

Next, the main CPU 231 executes the reel stop control process (S221). In this reel stop control process, the reels 203L, 203C, and 203R are stopped and controlled based on the game state, the internal winning combination, the stop control information, and the player's stop operation. Here, in this example, in the normal game state and the BB game state (first specification example), stop control is performed within the range of four maximum number of sliding pieces symbols for all reels 203L, 203C, 203R, and MB. In the gaming state (second specification example), stop control is performed for at least one or more reels of the reels 203L, 203C, and 203R within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces shown in FIG.

Although not shown, in step S221, the main CPU 231 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 271 to the sub control circuit 272, and the generated reel stop command data is assigned to the main RAM 233 for communication. Store in the data storage area. That is, the main CPU 231 performs a process of generating and storing the reel stop command. The reel stop command is the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position (that is, the symbol position when the stop button is operated) and the number of sliding pieces or the scheduled stop position (that is, the symbol position where the reel is actually scheduled to stop). ) Etc. is a command for making the information such as) recognizable by the sub CPU 281.

Next, the main CPU 231 executes the winning search process (S222). In this winning search process, whether or not the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line (display combination) is a combination of symbols related to a predetermined winning or the like after all reels 203L, 203C, 203R are stopped. Is judged.

Although not shown, in step S222, the main CPU 231 generates winning operation command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 271 to the sub control circuit 272, and the generated winning operation command data is assigned to the main RAM 233 for communication. Store in the data storage area. That is, the main CPU 231 performs a process of generating and storing a winning operation command. The winning operation command is a command for making information such as the type of display combination and the number of payouts (or the operation of replay or bonus) recognizable by the sub CPU 281.

Next, when the main CPU 231 determines as a result of the winning search process that the combination of the symbols of the small winning combination is displayed on the valid line, the main CPU 231 pays out the number of medals according to the type of the small winning combination. The process is executed (S223). In this medal payout process, medals are paid out and the number of credits is added by driving the hopper 240 based on the number of payouts.

Next, the main CPU 231 executes the RT game state update process (S224-1). In this RT game state update process, a process of updating the RT game state is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined transition opportunity of the RT game state.

In the pachi-slot gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example, when the RT gaming state is the low RT gaming state (RT0), when the ascending replay is established, the pachislot gaming machine 2b is shifted to the high RT gaming state (RT1) and transferred to the BB. If you win, you will be transferred to the bonus internal winning (RT2). In addition, when the RT gaming state is the high RT gaming state (RT1), if the descending replay or the descending symbol is established, the transition is made to the low RT gaming state (RT0), and if the BB is won, the bonus is internally won. Move to medium (RT2). Further, when the BB game state ends, the state shifts to the low RT game state (RT0).

Next, the main CPU 231 executes the bonus end check process (S225-1). In this bonus end check process, the BB game state is terminated when the end condition specified in the BB game state (in this example, more than "240" cards have been paid out) is satisfied.

Although not shown, when the BB game state is terminated in step S225-1, the main CPU 231 generates bonus end command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 271 to the sub control circuit 272, and the generated bonus end. The command data is stored in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 233. That is, the main CPU 231 performs a process of generating and storing a bonus end command. The bonus end command is a command for making information such as the end of the BB game state recognizable by the sub CPU 281.

Next, the main CPU 231 executes the bonus operation check process (S226-1). In this bonus operation check process, the BB game state is started when the start condition (BB establishment) of the BB game state is satisfied in the normal game state (during the bonus internal winning (RT2)). In addition, when the operating conditions for the re-game (normal replay, ascending replay, and descending replay are established) are satisfied, an automatic input request for operating the re-game is performed in the next game.

Although not shown, when the BB game state is started in step S226-1, the main CPU 231 generates bonus start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 271 to the sub control circuit 272, and the generated bonus start. The command data is stored in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 233. That is, the main CPU 231 performs a process of generating and storing a bonus start command. The bonus start command is a command for enabling the sub CPU 281 to recognize information such as the type of bonus that has started (one type in the first specification example) and the start of the BB game state.

Next, the main CPU 231 executes the advantageous section control process at the end of the game (S227-1). In this game end advantageous section control process, for example, when the advantageous section is started from the next game, the above-mentioned section display area (section indicator) is controlled to be turned on, and the advantageous section is ended in this game. Is controlled to turn off the above-mentioned section display area (section indicator). As described above, the timing at which the section display area (section indicator) is turned on and off is not limited to the timing, and can be set as appropriate.

Next, the main CPU 231 executes the lock execution process at the end of the game (S228). In this game end lock execution process, control is executed to invalidate the player's game operation (for example, throwing operation or start operation) for a predetermined period based on the establishment of various lock execution conditions. Rock. After executing the process of step S228, the main CPU 231 returns to the process of step S211.

[Example of the second specification of the game machine to which the game display device (game device) according to the first to ninth embodiments is connected]
Next, a second specification example of the game machine to which the game display device (game device) according to the first to ninth embodiments described above is connected will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 51. In this example as well, the pachi-slot gaming machine 2b will be described as an example of the gaming machine. Further, in this example, the same contents as those in the first specification example will be omitted.

FIG. 49 is a diagram showing the transition of the gaming state of the pachi-slot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example, and FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the configuration of the internal winning combination of the pachi-slot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a main control process of the pachislot machine 2b according to the second specification example.

<Transition of the gaming state of the pachislot gaming machine according to the second specification example>
First, with reference to FIG. 49, the transition of the gaming state of the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example will be described. As shown in FIG. 49, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example, the first advantageous section and the second advantageous section, which are game sections that are relatively advantageous to the player as a state in which the player plays a game It includes a section and a normal section which is a game section that is relatively disadvantageous to the player as compared with the first advantageous section and the second advantageous section.

Similar to the first specification example, the first advantageous section and the second advantageous section are relatively advantageous game sections in the sense that the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified, and the normal section is a normal section. Similar to the second specification example, the game section is relatively disadvantageous in the sense that the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player cannot be notified.

Further, as shown in FIG. 46, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example, the gaming state is relative to the MB gaming state (specific gaming state), which is relatively advantageous to the player. It has a normal gaming state that is disadvantageous to. Further, the MB gaming state is an MB1 gaming state (first specific gaming state) that shifts based on the establishment of MB1 described later, and an MB2 gaming state (second) that shifts based on the establishment of MB2 described later. Specific game state) and included.

In the normal game state, the low RT game state (RT0) having the lowest probability of winning the replay role, the high RT game state (RT2) having the highest probability of winning the replay role, and the low RT winning probability of the replay role It includes a medium RT gaming state (RT1) that is higher than the gaming state (RT0) and lower than the high RT gaming state (RT2). In comparison with the normal gaming states, the high RT gaming state (RT2) is most advantageous to the player, then the medium RT gaming state (RT1) is advantageous to the player, and the low RT gaming state (RT0). ) Is the most disadvantageous for the player. In the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example, the high RT gaming state (RT2) becomes the specific RT gaming state described above.

The MB game state (specific game state) is relatively advantageous in the sense that the winning probability of the medal payer (small role in this example) in which the medal is paid out to the player is higher than that in the normal game state. (See Fig. 50), and the normal game state is relative in the sense that the winning probability of this medal payout combination (small role in this example) is lower than that of the MB game state (specific game state). It is in a disadvantageous gaming state (see FIG. 50).

However, in the MB game state (specific game state), as described above, in at least one or more reels of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R, the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces is changed from four symbols to one symbol. Decrease. Therefore, the timing at which the player's stop operation can be an appropriate timing (the pressing position can be the correct answer) is also reduced, and the fluctuation range of the profit obtained becomes large according to the skill of the player's stop operation.

(Transition in normal section)
The player usually starts the game in the normal game state in the normal section. More specifically, the game is started from the low RT game state (RT0). As described above, in the normal section, since the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, the state shifts from the low RT gaming state (RT0) to the medium RT gaming state (RT1) or the high RT gaming state (RT2). Although the probability is low, if the push order is accidentally correct when the first push order replay or the second push order replay described later is won and the ascending replay 1 or ascending replay 2 described later is established, the low RT gaming state is established. It shifts from (RT0) to a medium RT gaming state (RT1) or a high RT gaming state (RT2). However, it is difficult to accidentally continue to answer correctly in the push order, and when the first push order replay or the second push order replay described later is won, the push order is incorrect and the descending replay 1 or descending replay 2 described later is established. Or, if the push order is incorrect when the push order small winning combination is won, and the push position is incorrect and the descending symbol described later is established, the medium RT game state (RT1) or the high RT game state (RT2) is established. ) To the low RT gaming state (RT0).

Further, in the normal gaming state (low RT gaming state (RT0), medium RT gaming state (RT1), and high RT gaming state (RT2)), MB1 (first specific combination) or MB2 (second specific combination) described later. When the winning combination (MB1 winning or MB2 winning) is stopped and the winning MB symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the valid line (MB1 established or MB2 established), the normal gaming state is changed to the MB1 gaming state (first specific gaming state). ) Or MB2 gaming state (second specific gaming state). Here, in this example, MB1 and MB2 are always established in the winning game (that is, in the winning game, the combination of the corresponding symbols can be stopped and displayed on the valid line regardless of the mode of the stop operation). It is configured. However, as in the case of BB in the first specification example, it may not be established if an appropriate stop operation is not performed, and it may be carried over as a “carry-over combination”.

Further, in the MB game state (specific game state), when the number of medals exceeding the predetermined number of medals to be paid out is paid out, the MB game state ends (MB1 end or MB2 end), and the MB game state is started. It shifts to the normal gaming state (more specifically, the RT gaming state before shifting to the MB gaming state). In this example, the predetermined number of medals to be paid out is set to "9".

In addition, when the MB1 (first specific combination) described later is won in the normal gaming state (low RT gaming state (RT0), medium RT gaming state (RT1), and high RT gaming state (RT2)), the first The advantageous section start condition is satisfied (advantageous section start condition A is satisfied), and it is notified that the section display area (section indicator) lights up at any timing until the start of the next unit game to shift to the advantageous section. At the same time, the next unit game shifts to the MB1 game state of the first advantageous section.

Further, in the normal gaming state (low RT gaming state (RT0), medium RT gaming state (RT1), and high RT gaming state (RT2)), when the special small winning combination described later is won, the second advantageous section start condition Is established (advantageous section start condition B is satisfied), the section display area (section indicator) is lit at any timing until the start of the next unit game, and it is notified that the section shifts to the advantageous section. The game shifts to the normal game state of the second advantageous section.

(Transition in the first advantageous section)
The first advantageous section is composed of the MB1 gaming state (first specific gaming state) of the advantageous section. The first advantageous section ends when the MB1 gaming state ends (MB1 end) (advantageous section end condition A is satisfied). That is, it is an advantageous section in which the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified only in the MB1 gaming state.

Here, in the MB1 game state (the same applies to the MB2 game state), the MB small and medium-sized combination described later is always determined as the internal winning combination, and for the replay combination, the winning probability in the normal gaming state remains the same. The lottery is taken over, and it is possible to be decided as an internal winning combination together with the MB small and medium-sized combination (see FIG. 50). Then, in the first game in the MB1 game state, when the MB small and medium-sized combination wins the push order replay (the first push order replays 1 to 6 and the second push order replays 1 to 6 described later) in duplicate, the game. If the person performs an appropriate stop operation, the specific small winning combination described later can be established and 9 medals can be paid out. As a result, the MB1 game state is changed to 2 (because the MB1 game state does not end in the first game). It can be extended to the second game, and in the second game in the MB game state, if the player performs an appropriate stop operation, the MB small and medium-sized role described later is established and 10 medals are paid out. It is possible to receive the largest number of medals to be paid out (see FIG. 50).

In the first advantageous section, the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is until the end of the first advantageous section (that is, until the end of the MB1 gaming state) so that the most medals can be paid out in the MB1 gaming state. ) Be notified. For example, in the first game in the MB1 game state, the procedure of the stop operation for establishing the specific small winning combination described later (that is, the procedure of the stop operation in which the push order is correct and the push position is correct) is notified, and the MB1 game state is announced. In the second game of, the procedure of the stop operation for establishing the MB small and medium-sized combination described later (that is, the procedure of the stop operation in which the pressing position is correct, or the procedure of the stop operation in which the pressing order is incorrect and the pressing position is correct). Is notified. However, for example, in the first game in the MB1 game state, when neither the specific small role described later nor the MB small / medium size combination is established (that is, when the pressing position is incorrect and the omission occurs), the MB1 game state is set. In the second game, the procedure of the stop operation for establishing the specific small winning combination described later is notified. That is, in the first advantageous section, in the game in which the medal can be paid out for the first time (assuming that the push order replay is won), the procedure of the stop operation for establishing the specific small winning combination described later is notified. Next, in a game in which medals can be paid out, the procedure of the stop operation for establishing the MB small and medium-sized combination described later is notified.

In addition, in the first game of the MB1 game state, if the MB small and medium-sized combination is won alone, or if it is won in duplicate with a replay combination other than the push order replay (for example, a normal replay), how is it stopped? Even if the operation is performed, the specific small winning combination described later is not established. In this case, the procedure of the stop operation for establishing the small and medium-sized combination of MB described later (that is, the procedure of the stop operation in which the pressing position is the correct answer) is notified. Will be done.

(Transition in the second advantageous section)
The second advantageous section is composed of a normal gaming state and an MB gaming state (specific gaming state) of the advantageous section. The second advantageous section is a predetermined number of games (games) since the start of the second advantageous section, regardless of whether the second advantageous section is in the normal gaming state or the MB gaming state (specific gaming state). It ends when the game of (period) is played (advantageous section end condition B is satisfied). In this example, the second advantageous section ends when "50" games are played. However, in this example, this game period is the initial game period given first when the player shifts to the second advantageous section, and if the predetermined extension condition is satisfied in the second advantageous section, the game period. Is extended (that is, the number of games in which the second advantageous section continues is added).

For example, in the second advantageous section, when the specific small winning combination or MB1 described later is determined as the internal winning combination, a predetermined additional lottery is performed and the lottery result extends the game period of the second advantageous section. If so, the game period of the second advantageous section is extended according to the lottery result. In the second advantageous section, when the specific small winning combination or MB1 described later is determined as the internal winning combination, the gaming period of the second advantageous section may be extended without going through a predetermined additional lottery. ..

In this example, when MB1 described later is determined as an internal winning combination in the second advantageous section, the second advantageous section is continued without shifting to the first advantageous section. This is because the game period is longer in the second advantageous section than in the first advantageous section. That is, the second advantageous section is more specifically composed of a normal gaming state, an MB1 gaming state (first specific gaming state), and an MB2 gaming state (second specific gaming state) of the advantageous section. However, when MB1 described later is determined as the internal winning combination in the second advantageous section, the second advantageous section may be terminated and the first advantageous section may be shifted (that is, the advantageous section may be overwritten) (that is, the advantageous section is overwritten). In FIG. 49, refer to the arrow of the alternate long and short dash line). In this way, the degree of advantage will differ depending on the timing at which MB1 described later is determined as the internal winning combination, so that the playability can be further diversified. As described above, in this example, the second advantageous section can be composed of the normal gaming state and the MB2 gaming state (second specific gaming state) of the advantageous section.

When the advantageous section start condition B is satisfied from the low RT gaming state (RT0) of the normal section and the second advantageous section is entered, the transition is made to the low RT gaming state (RT0) of the second advantageous section, and the normal section When the advantageous section start condition B is satisfied from the medium RT gaming state (RT1) and the second advantageous section is entered, the second advantageous section is transitioned to the medium RT gaming state (RT1), and the high RT gaming in the normal section is also performed. When the advantageous section start condition B is satisfied from the state (RT2) and the second advantageous section is entered, the state (RT2) shifts to the high RT gaming state (RT2) of the second advantageous section. Here, as described above, in the second advantageous section, the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, so as long as the stop operation is performed according to the notification, the push order replay is correctly answered when the push order replay is won. When the ascending replay 1 and the ascending replay 2 described later are established and the low RT gaming state (RT0) is established, the low RT gaming state (RT0) shifts to the medium RT gaming state (RT1), and the medium RT gaming state is established. When it is in the state (RT1), it shifts from the medium RT gaming state (RT1) to the high RT gaming state (RT2). Further, in the case of the high RT gaming state (RT2), the high RT gaming state (RT2) is maintained.

In addition, when the push order small win is won, the push order is correct and the specific small win described later is established, and the most medals are paid out to the player. Further, in the MB gaming state (MB1 and MB2 gaming states) of the advantageous section, as described above, the largest number of medals can be paid out in the MB gaming state.

In this example, the second advantageous section starts when the advantageous section start condition B is satisfied, and if the game period is extended, the extended game period ends, or the game period is not extended. Is set to continue until the number of games (50 times), which is the initial game period, is completed (that is, until the advantageous section end condition B is satisfied), but the advantageous section end condition is not limited to this. .. For example, as described above, the game period may be managed by the difference number of sheets or the number of notifications. Further, even if the game period of the second advantageous section is extended, if the game period of the second advantageous section reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, 1500 games), the game is gambling. From the viewpoint of restraint, the second advantageous section may be forcibly terminated to shift to the normal gaming state.

In addition, during the MB game state (specific game state) in this example, as will be described later, when the push order replay is won, a specific small winning combination is established if the push order is correct and the push position is correct, and the push order is incorrect. In addition, if the pressing position is correct, the MB small and medium-sized combination is established, and if the pressing position is incorrect, the omission occurs, but the mode of stop control in the MB gaming state (specific gaming state) is limited to this. is not it. For example, when the push order replay is won, a specific small winning combination is established if the pushing order is correct, regardless of the pressing position (that is, regardless of the timing of the stop operation), and an MB small / medium winning combination is established if the pushing order is incorrect. May be established. Also, for example, when the push order replay is won, regardless of the push order (that is, the push order does not matter), a specific small winning combination is established if the pressing position is correct, and an MB small / medium winning combination is established if the pressing position is incorrect. You may try to do it.

Also, for example, during the MB game state (specific game state), regardless of whether or not the push order replay is won (that is, regardless of the presence or absence and type of the internal winning combination that is won in duplicate with the MB small and medium-sized combination). , If the push order is correct and the pressing position is correct, a specific small winning combination is established, if the pushing order is incorrect and the pressing position is correct, the MB small and medium-sized combination is established, and if the pressing position is incorrect, a missing answer occurs. May be good. Also in this case, regardless of the pressing position (that is, regardless of the timing of the stop operation), a specific small winning combination is established if the pressing order is correct, and an MB small / medium winning combination is established if the pressing order is incorrect. However, regardless of the pressing order (that is, the pressing order does not matter), a specific small winning combination may be established if the pressing position is correct, and an MB small / medium winning combination may be established if the pressing position is incorrect. ..

<Structure of internal winning combination of pachislot machine according to the second specification example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the configuration of the internal winning combination of the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example will be described. Note that FIG. 50 shows an internal lottery table used for determining an internal winning combination in the internal lottery process (see S214-2 in FIG. 51) described later.

As shown in FIG. 50, the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example has normal replay, first push order replays 1 to 6, second push order replays 1 to 6, normal small win, and push as internal winning combinations. It includes forward small roles 1 to 6, special small roles, MB small and medium-sized roles, MB1 and MB2. In FIG. 50, a specific set value (for example, a set value “1”) is set in the pachislot game machine 2b according to the second specification example, and “3” medals are set in the normal game state and the MB game state. Shows the internal lottery table that is referenced when is entered.

In the normal replay, the lottery value "4490" is defined in the low RT gaming state (RT0) and the medium RT gaming state (RT1), and the player wins with a probability of 4490/65536. Further, in the high RT gaming state (RT2), the lottery value "35977" is defined, and the player wins with a probability of 35977/65536. The lottery value varies depending on the set value. Specifically, the lottery value of the normal small winning combination, which will be described later, increases (the numerical value increases) as the set value increases, and decreases (the numerical value decreases). Further, in the MB game state, the lottery value in the RT game state before the transition is inherited and the lottery is performed. The same applies to the first push order replays 1 to 6 and the second push order replays 1 to 6 shown below. However, the replay combination is not established in the MB game state. That is, when the replay combination and the small combination are won in duplicate in the MB game state, the stop control is performed so that the small combination is preferentially stopped and displayed over the replay combination. It should be noted that the stop control may be performed so that the replay combination can be stopped and displayed according to the pressing order, the pressing position, etc., and for a specific replay combination (for example, a normal replay), the replay combination is more relevant than the small combination. The stop control may be performed so that the replay combination is preferentially stopped and displayed.

When the normal replay is won, in the game state other than the MB game state, regardless of the push order and the push position (that is, the timing when the player performs the stop operation) (the push order and the push position do not matter), the normal replay symbol The combination of is stopped and displayed on the valid line (normal replay is established). It should be noted that each symbol constituting the combination of symbols of the normal replay is appropriately arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R so that such stop control can be performed.

In each of the first push order replays 1 to 6, a lottery value "748" is defined in the low RT gaming state (RT0), and the first push order replays 1 to 6 are won with a probability of 748/65536. Further, the lottery value "0" is defined in the medium RT gaming state (RT1) and the high RT gaming state (RT2), and the player is not won in the medium RT gaming state (RT1) and the high RT gaming state (RT2).

When the first push order replay 1 is won, if the stop operation is performed with the correct push order answer (123), the combination of the symbols of the ascending replay 1 is stopped and displayed on the valid line (regardless of the pressing position). (Rise replay 1 is established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with an incorrect push order, the combination of the symbols of the descending replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descending replay is established).

When the first push order replay 2 is won, if the stop operation is performed with the correct push order answer (132), the combination of the symbols of the ascending replay 1 is stopped and displayed on the valid line (regardless of the pressing position). (Rise replay 1 is established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with an incorrect push order, the combination of the symbols of the descending replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descending replay is established).

When the first push order replay 3 is won, if the stop operation is performed with the correct push order answer (213), the combination of the symbols of the ascending replay 1 is stopped and displayed on the valid line (regardless of the pressing position). (Rise replay 1 is established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with an incorrect push order, the combination of the symbols of the descending replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descending replay is established).

When the first push order replay 4 is won, if the stop operation is performed with the correct push order answer (231), the combination of the symbols of the ascending replay 1 is stopped and displayed on the valid line (regardless of the pressing position). (Rise replay 1 is established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with an incorrect push order, the combination of the symbols of the descending replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descending replay is established).

When the first push order replay 5 is won, if the stop operation is performed with the correct push order answer (312), the combination of the symbols of the ascending replay 1 is stopped and displayed on the valid line (regardless of the pressing position). (Rise replay 1 is established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with an incorrect push order, the combination of the symbols of the descending replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descending replay is established).

When the first push order replay 6 is won, if the stop operation is performed with the correct push order answer (321), the combination of the symbols of the ascending replay 1 is stopped and displayed on the valid line (regardless of the pressing position). (Rise replay 1 is established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with an incorrect push order, the combination of the symbols of the descending replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descending replay is established).

In this way, if any of the first push order replays 1 to 6 is won, and if the stop operation is performed in the push order that is the correct push order, the combination of the symbols of the ascending replay 1 is on the effective line. When the stop display is displayed, the combination (rises) from the low RT gaming state (RT0) to the medium RT gaming state (RT1). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed in the push order in which the push order is incorrect, the combination of the symbols of the descending replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line, so that the low RT gaming state (RT0) is maintained. .. The symbols constituting the combination of the symbols of the ascending replay 1 and the symbols of the descending replay are appropriately arranged on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 203L, 203C, and 203R so that such stop control can be performed.

In the second push order replays 1 to 6, a lottery value "3567" is defined in the medium RT gaming state (RT1) and the high RT gaming state (RT2), respectively, and the second push order replays 1 to 6 are won with a probability of 3567/65536. Further, the lottery value "0" is defined in the low RT gaming state (RT0), and the player is not won in the low RT gaming state (RT0).

When the second push order replay 1 is won, if the stop operation is performed with the correct push order answer (123), the combination of the symbols of the ascending replay 2 is stopped and displayed on the valid line (regardless of the pressing position). (Rise replay 2 is established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with an incorrect push order, the combination of the symbols of the descending replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descending replay is established).

When the second push order replay 2 is won, if the stop operation is performed with the correct push order answer (132), the combination of the symbols of the ascending replay 2 is stopped and displayed on the valid line (regardless of the pressing position). (Rise replay 2 is established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with an incorrect push order, the combination of the symbols of the descending replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descending replay is established).

If the second push order replay 3 is won, and if the stop operation is performed with the correct push order answer (213), the combination of the symbols of the ascending replay 2 is stopped and displayed on the valid line (regardless of the pressing position). (Rise replay 2 is established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with an incorrect push order, the combination of the symbols of the descending replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descending replay is established).

When the second push order replay 4 is won, if the stop operation is performed with the correct push order answer (231), the combination of the symbols of the ascending replay 2 is stopped and displayed on the valid line (regardless of the pressing position). (Rise replay 2 is established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with an incorrect push order, the combination of the symbols of the descending replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descending replay is established).

When the second push order replay 5 is won, if the stop operation is performed with the correct push order answer (312), the combination of the symbols of the ascending replay 2 is stopped and displayed on the valid line (regardless of the pressing position). (Rise replay 2 is established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with an incorrect push order, the combination of the symbols of the descending replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descending replay is established).

When the second push order replay 6 is won, if the stop operation is performed with the correct push order answer (321), the combination of the symbols of the ascending replay 2 is stopped and displayed on the valid line (regardless of the pressing position). (Rise replay 2 is established). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with an incorrect push order, the combination of the symbols of the descending replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line (descending replay is established).

In this way, if any of the second push order replays 1 to 6 is won, and if the stop operation is performed in the push order that is the correct push order, the combination of the symbols of the ascending replay 2 is on the effective line. When the stop display is displayed, the medium RT gaming state (RT1) shifts (rises) to the high RT gaming state (RT2), and if it is the high RT gaming state (RT2), the high RT gaming state (RT2) is maintained. .. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed in the push order in which the push order is incorrect, the combination of the symbols of the descending replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line, so that the medium RT game state (RT1) and the high RT game are displayed. It shifts (descends) from the state (RT2) to the low RT gaming state (RT0). The symbols constituting the combination of the symbols of the ascending replay 2 and the symbols of the descending replay are appropriately arranged on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 203L, 203C, and 203R so that such stop control can be performed.

For the normal small win, a lottery value "1284" is defined in the normal game state (low RT game state (RT0), medium RT game state (RT1), and high RT game state (RT2)), and the probability is 1284/65536. Win with. The lottery value varies depending on the set value. Specifically, it is defined that the lottery value increases as the set value increases (for example, the lottery value is added by "4" every time the set value is added by 1). In addition, the lottery value "0" is defined in the MB game state, and the player is not won in the MB game state. However, since the MB small and medium-sized winning combination described later is an internal winning combination in which all the specified combinations of small and medium-sized winning combinations are allowed to be stopped and displayed on the valid line, in that sense, in the MB gaming state. Can also be said to win. The same applies to push order small wins 1 to 6 and other small wins.

It should be noted that the lottery values and stop control modes of the normal small winning combination and the pushing order small winning combination 1 to 6 in the second specification example are basically the same as those in the first specification example (see FIGS. 47 and 50). ), The description is omitted here.

For the special small role, the lottery value "32" is defined in the normal gaming state (low RT gaming state (RT0), medium RT gaming state (RT1), and high RT gaming state (RT2)), and the probability is 32/65536. To win.

If you win a special small winning combination, regardless of the pushing order or pressing position (regardless of pushing order or pressing position), the combination of symbols of the special small winning combination will be stopped and displayed on the valid line (special small winning combination is established). The medal will be paid out. Each symbol constituting the combination of symbols of the special small combination is appropriately arranged on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R so that such stop control can be performed. Further, as described above, if the special small winning combination is won in the normal section, the advantageous section start condition (advantageous section start condition B) is satisfied, and the process shifts to the second advantageous section.

The lottery value "65536" is defined in the MB game state (MB1 game state and MB2 game state), and the MB small and medium-sized combination is won with a probability of 65536/65536. That is, the winner is always won in the MB game state. In this example, in the MB game state, an internal winning combination called the MB small and medium-sized combination is provided so that the combination of all the specified small combination symbols is allowed to be stopped and displayed on the valid line. However, the method of determining the internal winning combination in the MB game state is not limited to this. For example, in the internal lottery process described later (see S214-2 in FIG. 51), the internal winning combination is determined with reference to the internal lottery table corresponding to the current normal gaming state (any of RT0 to RT2), and before and after that. In the above, the process of permitting the combination of all the specified small winning combination symbols to be stopped and displayed on the valid line may be executed. In this case, it is not necessary to separately specify the internal winning combination of the MB small and medium-sized combination and the internal lottery table used in the MB game state, so that the free space of the main ROM 232 can be secured.

If the MB small and medium-sized winning combination is won, the first push order replay 1 or the second push order replay 1 is also won in duplicate, and if the stop operation is performed with the correct push order answer (123), the game is stopped. If the timing of the operation is appropriate (correct answer at the pressing position), the combination of symbols of the specific small winning combination will be stopped and displayed on the valid line (specific small winning combination is established), and 9 medals will be paid out, but the stop operation will be performed. If the timing is not appropriate (incorrect answer of the pressed position), the combination of symbols that will be lost is stopped and displayed on the effective line (missing). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with an incorrect push order answer, if the stop operation timing is appropriate (press position correct answer), the combination of MB small and medium-sized combination symbols is stopped and displayed on the valid line ( MB small and medium-sized winning combination is established), 10 medals are paid out, but if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (pressing position incorrect answer), the combination of symbols that will be lost is stopped and displayed on the valid line (missed) ).

If the MB small and medium-sized winning combination is won, the first push order replay 2 or the second push order replay 2 is also won in duplicate, and if the stop operation is performed with the correct push order answer (132), the game is stopped. If the timing of the operation is appropriate (correct answer at the pressing position), the combination of symbols of the specific small winning combination will be stopped and displayed on the valid line (specific small winning combination is established), and 9 medals will be paid out, but the stop operation will be performed. If the timing is not appropriate (incorrect answer of the pressed position), the combination of symbols that will be lost is stopped and displayed on the effective line (missing). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with an incorrect push order answer, if the stop operation timing is appropriate (press position correct answer), the combination of MB small and medium-sized combination symbols is stopped and displayed on the valid line ( MB small and medium-sized winning combination is established), 10 medals are paid out, but if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (pressing position incorrect answer), the combination of symbols that will be lost is stopped and displayed on the valid line (missed) ).

If the MB small and medium-sized winning combination is won, the first push order replay 3 or the second push order replay 3 is also won in duplicate, and if the stop operation is performed with the correct push order answer (213), the game is stopped. If the timing of the operation is appropriate (correct answer at the pressing position), the combination of symbols of the specific small winning combination will be stopped and displayed on the valid line (specific small winning combination is established), and 9 medals will be paid out, but the stop operation will be performed. If the timing is not appropriate (incorrect answer of the pressed position), the combination of symbols that will be lost is stopped and displayed on the effective line (missing). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with an incorrect push order answer, if the stop operation timing is appropriate (press position correct answer), the combination of MB small and medium-sized combination symbols is stopped and displayed on the valid line ( MB small and medium-sized winning combination is established), 10 medals are paid out, but if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (pressing position incorrect answer), the combination of symbols that will be lost is stopped and displayed on the valid line (missed) ).

If the MB small and medium-sized winning combination is won, the first push order replay 4 or the second push order replay 4 is also won in duplicate, and if the stop operation is performed with the correct push order answer (231), the game is stopped. If the timing of the operation is appropriate (correct answer at the pressing position), the combination of symbols of the specific small winning combination will be stopped and displayed on the valid line (specific small winning combination is established), and 9 medals will be paid out, but the stop operation will be performed. If the timing is not appropriate (incorrect answer of the pressed position), the combination of symbols that will be lost is stopped and displayed on the effective line (missing). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with an incorrect push order answer, if the stop operation timing is appropriate (press position correct answer), the combination of MB small and medium-sized combination symbols is stopped and displayed on the valid line ( MB small and medium-sized winning combination is established), 10 medals are paid out, but if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (pressing position incorrect answer), the combination of symbols that will be lost is stopped and displayed on the valid line (missed) ).

If the MB small and medium-sized winning combination is won, the first push order replay 5 or the second push order replay 5 is also won in duplicate, and if the stop operation is performed with the correct push order answer (312), the game is stopped. If the timing of the operation is appropriate (correct answer at the pressing position), the combination of symbols of the specific small winning combination will be stopped and displayed on the valid line (specific small winning combination is established), and 9 medals will be paid out, but the stop operation will be performed. If the timing is not appropriate (incorrect answer of the pressed position), the combination of symbols that will be lost is stopped and displayed on the effective line (missing). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with an incorrect push order answer, if the stop operation timing is appropriate (press position correct answer), the combination of MB small and medium-sized combination symbols is stopped and displayed on the valid line ( MB small and medium-sized winning combination is established), 10 medals are paid out, but if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (pressing position incorrect answer), the combination of symbols that will be lost is stopped and displayed on the valid line (missed) ).

If the MB small and medium-sized winning combination is won, the first push order replay 6 or the second push order replay 6 is also won in duplicate, and if the stop operation is performed with the correct push order answer (321), the game is stopped. If the timing of the operation is appropriate (correct answer at the pressing position), the combination of symbols of the specific small winning combination will be stopped and displayed on the valid line (specific small winning combination is established), and 9 medals will be paid out, but the stop operation will be performed. If the timing is not appropriate (incorrect answer of the pressed position), the combination of symbols that will be lost is stopped and displayed on the effective line (missing). On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed with an incorrect push order answer, if the stop operation timing is appropriate (press position correct answer), the combination of MB small and medium-sized combination symbols is stopped and displayed on the valid line ( MB small and medium-sized winning combination is established), 10 medals are paid out, but if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (pressing position incorrect answer), the combination of symbols that will be lost is stopped and displayed on the valid line (missed) ).

If you win the MB small and medium-sized wins and other wins do not win in duplicate (when you win alone), or push order replays (1st push order replays 1 to 6 and 2nd push order replays 1 to 1) If replay combinations other than 6) (for example, normal replay) are won in duplicate, and if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate (pressing position correct answer), the combination of MB small and medium-sized combination symbols will stop on the effective line. It is displayed (MB small and medium-sized combination is established), and 10 medals are paid out, but if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (incorrect answer of the pressing position), the combination of symbols that will be lost is stopped and displayed on the valid line. Ru (missing).

In this way, if any of the MB small and medium-sized winning combination and the push order replay (1st push order replays 1 to 6 and 2nd push order replays 1 to 6) are won in duplicate, the push order will be the correct answer. In addition, when the stop operation is performed at the timing when the pressing position is correct, the combination of the symbols of the specific small winning combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line, and nine medals are paid out. If it is the first game in the state, the MB game state can be continued to the second game. On the other hand, if the stop operation is performed in the push order that is the wrong answer in the push order, but the stop operation is performed at the timing when the push position is correct, the combination of the symbols of the MB small and medium size is displayed as a stop on the valid line. By doing so, 10 medals are paid out. For example, in the case of the first game in the MB game state, the MB game state cannot be continued to the second game. Further, regardless of the pressing order, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the pressing position is incorrect, the omission will occur. Each symbol constituting the combination of the symbols of the specific small combination and the symbol of the MB small / medium combination is appropriately arranged on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 203L, 203C, 203R so that such stop control can be performed.

In addition, the combination of the symbols of the specific small combination related to the push order small combination and the combination of the symbols of the specific small combination related to the MB small and medium-sized combination are the same combination of symbols, and the maximum number of sliding pieces is four symbols. In some cases, it is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, but when the maximum number of sliding pieces is one symbol, it is arranged so that it is established only when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. It may be defined as a combination of symbols composed of the above symbols, or may be defined as a combination of different symbols.

The lottery value "64" is defined for MB1 in the normal gaming state (low RT gaming state (RT0), medium RT gaming state (RT1), and high RT gaming state (RT2)), and the MB1 is won with a probability of 64/65536. To do. Further, the lottery value "0" is defined in the MB game state (MB1 game state and MB2 game state), and the player is not won in the MB game state.

If you win MB1, regardless of the pushing order or pressing position (regardless of pushing order or pressing position), the combination of MB1 symbols will be stopped and displayed on the valid line (MB1 is established), and no medals will be paid out, but the next game Shifts to the MB1 game state. Further, as described above, if the MB1 is won in the normal section, the advantageous section start condition (advantageous section start condition A) is satisfied, and the next game shifts to the first advantageous section.

The lottery value "777" is defined for MB2 in the normal gaming state (low RT gaming state (RT0), medium RT gaming state (RT1), and high RT gaming state (RT2)), and the MB2 is won with a probability of 777/65536. To do. Further, the lottery value "0" is defined in the MB game state (MB1 game state and MB2 game state), and the player is not won in the MB game state.

If you win MB2, regardless of the pushing order or pressing position (regardless of pushing order or pressing position), the combination of MB2 symbols will be stopped and displayed on the valid line (MB2 is established), and no medals will be paid out, but the next game. Shifts to the MB2 game state. The symbols constituting the combination of the symbols of MB1 and the combination of symbols of MB2 are appropriately arranged on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 203L, 203C, and 203R so that such stop control can be performed.

<Main control processing of pachislot machine according to the second specification example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the main control process of the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example will be described. The main control process shown in FIG. 51 is executed by the main CPU 231 as in the first specification example. Further, the description of the process in which the same process as that in the first specification example is executed is omitted.

First, the main CPU 231 executes the power-on processing as in the first specification example (S210). Next, the main CPU 231 executes the initialization process at the end of one game (one unit game) as in the first specification example (S211). Next, the main CPU 231 executes the medal acceptance / start check process as in the first specification example (S212). Next, the main CPU 231 extracts a necessary random number value and stores it in the random number value storage area allocated to the main RAM 233 (S213).

Next, the main CPU 231 executes the internal lottery process as in the first specification example (S214-2). As described above, in the MB game state, the internal winning combination may be determined based on the internal lottery table for the MB game state (see the column of the MB game state in FIG. 50), or the normal game may be determined. The internal winning combination is determined based on the internal lottery table for the state (see each column of the general gaming state in FIG. 50), and before and after that, all the specified small winning combinations (for example, normal small winning combination and specific small winning combination) are determined. , Special small combination, special small combination and MB small / medium combination) may be allowed to be stopped and displayed on the effective line (that is, determined as an internal winning combination). Further, when MB1 and MB2 are configured as carry-over combinations and MB1 or MB2 is carried over in the normal gaming state, MB1 or MB2 is synthesized with the internal winning combination determined as the above-mentioned processing result. , It may be decided as an internal winner.

Next, the main CPU 231 executes the advantageous section control process at the start of the game as in the first specification example (S215-2). In this game start advantageous section control process, if the current game section is the first advantageous section, a process for continuing the first advantageous section until the end of the MB1 gaming state is performed. If the current game section is the second advantageous section, the number of games played in the second advantageous section is counted (adding "1" for each game), and the counting result satisfies the advantageous section end condition. When (the number of games is "50" when the second advantageous section is not extended, and when the second advantageous section is extended, the number of games extended is consumed. When), the process for ending the advantageous section is performed. Further, when the current gaming section is the second advantageous section and the above-mentioned predetermined extension condition is satisfied, a process for extending the gaming period of the second advantageous section (adding the number of games) is performed. ..

Further, if the current game section is a normal section, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section start condition (advantageous section start condition A or advantageous section start condition B) is satisfied based on the determined internal winning combination. When it is determined that the advantageous section start condition is satisfied, the process for starting the first advantageous section or the second advantageous section from the next game is performed.

Although not shown, in step S215-2, as in the first specification example, the main CPU 231 generates an effect state command for transmitting from the main control circuit 271 to the sub control circuit 272, and the generated effect. The status command data is stored in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 233. That is, the main CPU 231 performs a process of generating and storing the effect state command.

In the main CPU 231, for example, when the current game section is the first advantageous section and the MB small and medium-sized combination and the push order replay 1 (first push order replay 1 or second push order replay 1) are won in duplicate, If the game is the first game in which the medal can be paid out in the MB game state (for example, the first game in the MB game state), the push order is correct (123) and the push position is correct (appropriate timing of stop operation, or a predetermined time). "7" is transmitted as instruction information indicating the symbol position). On the other hand, if the game is the last game in which the medal can be paid out in the MB game state (for example, the second game in the MB game state), the push order is incorrect (other than 123) and the push position is correct (appropriate timing of the stop operation). , Or "10" is transmitted as instruction information indicating a predetermined symbol position). The same applies when the current game section is the second advantageous section and the MB small and medium-sized combination and the push order replay 1 (first push order replay 1 or second push order replay 1) are duplicated and won.

Further, for example, when the current game section is the first advantageous section and the MB small and medium-sized combination and the push order replay 2 (first push order replay 2 or second push order replay 2) are won in duplicate, the MB game If it is a game in which the medal can be paid out first in the state (for example, the first game in the MB game state), the push order is correct (132) and the push position is correct (appropriate timing of stop operation, or a predetermined symbol position). ) Is transmitted as instruction information indicating. On the other hand, if the game is the last game in which the medal can be paid out in the MB game state (for example, the second game in the MB game state), the push order is incorrect (other than 132) and the push position is correct (appropriate timing of the stop operation). , Or "11" is transmitted as instruction information indicating a predetermined symbol position). The same applies when the current game section is the second advantageous section and the MB small and medium-sized combination and the push order replay 2 (first push order replay 2 or second push order replay 2) are duplicated and won.

Further, for example, when the current game section is the first advantageous section and the MB small and medium-sized combination and the push order replay 3 (first push order replay 3 or second push order replay 3) are won in duplicate, the MB game If it is a game in which the medal can be paid out first in the state (for example, the first game in the MB game state), the push order is correct (213) and the push position is correct (appropriate timing of stop operation, or a predetermined symbol position). ) Is transmitted as instruction information indicating. On the other hand, if the game is the last game in which the medal can be paid out in the MB game state (for example, the second game in the MB game state), the push order is incorrect (other than 213) and the push position is correct (appropriate timing of the stop operation). , Or "12" is transmitted as instruction information indicating a predetermined symbol position). The same applies when the current game section is the second advantageous section and the MB small and medium-sized combination and the push order replay 3 (first push order replay 3 or second push order replay 3) are duplicated and won.

Further, for example, when the current game section is the first advantageous section and the MB small and medium-sized combination and the push order replay 4 (first push order replay 4 or second push order replay 4) are won in duplicate, the MB game If it is a game in which the medal can be paid out first in the state (for example, the first game in the MB game state), the push order is correct (231) and the push position is correct (appropriate timing of stop operation, or a predetermined symbol position). ) Is transmitted as instruction information indicating. On the other hand, if the game is the last game in which the medal can be paid out in the MB game state (for example, the second game in the MB game state), the push order is incorrect (other than 231) and the push position is correct (appropriate timing of the stop operation). , Or "7" is transmitted as instruction information indicating a predetermined symbol position). The same applies when the current game section is the second advantageous section and the MB small and medium-sized combination and the push order replay 4 (first push order replay 4 or second push order replay 4) are duplicated and won.

Further, for example, when the current game section is the first advantageous section and the MB small and medium-sized combination and the push order replay 5 (first push order replay 5 or second push order replay 5) are won in duplicate, the MB game If it is a game in which the medal can be paid out first in the state (for example, the first game in the MB game state), the push order is correct (312) and the push position is correct (appropriate timing of stop operation or predetermined symbol position). ) Is transmitted as instruction information indicating. On the other hand, if the game is the last game in which the medal can be paid out in the MB game state (for example, the second game in the MB game state), the push order is incorrect (other than 312) and the push position is correct (appropriate timing of the stop operation). , Or "8" is transmitted as instruction information indicating a predetermined symbol position). The same applies when the current game section is the second advantageous section and the MB small and medium-sized combination and the push order replay 5 (first push order replay 5 or second push order replay 5) are duplicated and won.

Further, for example, when the current game section is the first advantageous section and the MB small and medium-sized combination and the push order replay 6 (first push order replay 6 or second push order replay 6) are won in duplicate, the MB game If it is a game in which the medal can be paid out first in the state (for example, the first game in the MB game state), the push order is correct (321) and the push position is correct (appropriate timing of stop operation, or a predetermined symbol position). ) Is transmitted as instruction information indicating. On the other hand, if the game is the last game in which the medal can be paid out in the MB game state (for example, the second game in the MB game state), the push order is incorrect (other than 321) and the push position is correct (appropriate timing of the stop operation). , Or "9" is transmitted as instruction information indicating a predetermined symbol position). The same applies when the current game section is the second advantageous section and the MB small and medium-sized combination and the push order replay 6 (first push order replay 6 or second push order replay 6) are duplicated and won.

Further, for example, the current game section is the first advantageous section, and the MB small and medium-sized combination overlaps with any of the push order replays 1 to 6 (first push order replays 1 to 6 or second push order replays 1 to 6). If the winner is not won, "13" is transmitted as instruction information indicating the correct answer of the pressing position (appropriate timing of the stop operation or a predetermined symbol position). The current game section is the second advantageous section, and the MB small and medium-sized combination is not won in duplicate with any of the push order replays 1 to 6 (first push order replays 1 to 6 or second push order replays 1 to 6). The same applies when

Further, for example, when the current game section is the second advantageous section and the push order replay 1 or the push order small winning combination 1 is won, "1" is transmitted as instruction information indicating the push order correct answer (123) and the push is pushed. If you win the forward replay 2 or the push order small win 2, "2" is sent as instruction information indicating the push order correct answer (132), and if you win the push order replay 3 or the push order small win 3, the push order correct answer (132). When "3" is transmitted as the instruction information indicating (213) and the push order replay 4 or the push order small winning combination 4 is won, "4" is transmitted as the instruction information indicating the push order correct answer (231) and the push order is received. If the replay 5 or the push order small winning combination 5 is won, "5" is transmitted as instruction information indicating the pushing order correct answer (312), and if the pushing order replay 6 or the pushing order small winning combination 6 is won, the pushing order correct answer (312) is sent. "6" is transmitted as instruction information indicating 321).

The mode of the instruction information is not limited to the above-mentioned one as in the first specification example, and can be appropriately set. That is, the information may be such that the sub CPU 281 can recognize which stop operation procedure is advantageous for the player. The same applies to the mode of transmission of instruction information and the mode of notification.

Next, the main CPU 231 executes the reel stop initial setting process as in the first specification example (S216). Next, the main CPU 231 generates start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 271 to the sub control circuit 272 as in the first specification example, and the generated start command data is stored in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 233. Store (S217). Next, the main CPU 231 executes the lock execution process at the start of the game as in the first specification example (S218). Next, the main CPU 231 executes the wait process as in the first specification example (S219). Next, the main CPU 231 executes the reel rotation start process as in the first specification example (S220). Next, the main CPU 231 executes the reel stop control process as in the first specification example (S221). Next, the main CPU 231 executes the winning search process as in the first specification example (S222). Next, the medal payout process is executed as in the first specification example (S223).

Next, the main CPU 231 executes the RT game state update process as in the first specification example (S224-2). In this RT game state update process, a process of updating the RT game state is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined transition opportunity of the RT game state.

In the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example, when the RT gaming state is the low RT gaming state (RT0), when the ascending replay 1 is established, the pachislot gaming machine 2b is shifted to the medium RT gaming state (RT1). Further, when the RT game state is the medium RT game state (RT1) and the ascending replay 2 is established, the state shifts to the high RT game state (RT2). Further, when the RT gaming state is the medium RT gaming state (RT1) and the high RT gaming state (RT2), if the descending replay or the descending symbol is established, the mode is shifted to the low RT gaming state (RT0).

Next, the main CPU 231 executes the bonus end check process as in the first specification example (S225-2). In this bonus end check process, the MB game state is terminated when the end condition specified in the MB game state (in this example, more than "9" cards have been paid out) is satisfied. In this example, the same end condition is specified for the MB1 game state and the MB2 game state, but the specified end condition is not limited to this. For example, the end condition of the MB1 gaming state may be defined so that the game can be played a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) or more regardless of which combination is established.

Although not shown, when the MB game state is terminated in step S225-2, the main CPU 231 generates bonus end command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 271 to the sub control circuit 272, and the generated bonus end. The command data is stored in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 233. That is, the main CPU 231 performs a process of generating and storing a bonus end command. The bonus end command is a command for making information such as the end of the MB game state recognizable by the sub CPU 281.

Next, the main CPU 231 executes the bonus operation check process as in the first specification example (S226-2). In this bonus operation check process, when the start condition of the MB gaming state (MB1 establishment or MB2 establishment) is satisfied in the normal gaming state, the MB gaming state (MB1 gaming state or MB2 gaming state) is started. Further, when the operating conditions of the re-game (normal replay, ascending replay 1, ascending replay 2 and descending replay are established) are satisfied, an automatic input request for operating the re-game is performed in the next game.

Although not shown, when the MB game state is started in step S226-2, the main CPU 231 generates bonus start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 271 to the sub control circuit 272, and the generated bonus start. The command data is stored in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 233. That is, the main CPU 231 performs a process of generating and storing a bonus start command. The bonus start command is a command for allowing the sub CPU 281 to recognize information such as, for example, the type of bonus that has started (two types in the second specification example) and the start of the MB game state.

Next, the main CPU 231 executes the advantageous section control process at the end of the game as in the first specification example (S227-2). In this game end-time advantageous section control process, for example, when starting the first advantageous section or the second advantageous section from the next game, the above-mentioned section display area (section indicator) is controlled to be turned on, and this time the game is played. When the first advantageous section or the second advantageous section is terminated, the above-mentioned section display area (section indicator) is controlled to be turned off. As described above, the timing at which the section display area (section indicator) is turned on and off is not limited to the timing, and can be set as appropriate.

Next, the main CPU 231 executes the lock execution process at the end of the game as in the first specification example (S228). After executing the process of step S228, the main CPU 231 returns to the process of step S211.

[Example of a flowchart of a control process of a game display device (game device) according to the first to ninth embodiments when the game machine according to the first specification example is connected]
Next, FIG. 52 and FIG. 52 show an example of control processing of the game display device (game device) according to the first to ninth embodiments described above when the game machine according to the first specification example described above is connected. This will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a first example of the main control process of the game display device 1 when the pachislot game machine 2b according to the above-mentioned first specification example is connected, and FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the above-mentioned first example. It is a figure which shows the 2nd example of the main control processing of the game display device 1 when the pachislot game machine 2b which concerns on 1 specification example is connected. The main process of the game display device 1 is executed by a control means (for example, the display CPU 101 described above or the control circuit F10250 described above) that controls the display in the game display device 1. Hereinafter, the processing performed by the display CPU 101 will be described.

<First example of main control processing of game display device 1>
First, with reference to FIG. 52, a first example of the main control process of the game display device 1 will be described. In this first example, the pachislot gaming machine 2b continuously outputs the advantageous section signal from the time when it decides to start the advantageous section until it decides to end the advantageous section (that is, the advantageous section). (It is possible for the game display device 1 side to recognize that the game is started, that the advantageous section is in progress, and that the advantageous section is ended) will be described as an example.

First, when the power is turned on to the game display device 1, the display CPU 101 executes the power-on processing (S110). In this power-on processing, the initialization processing as the processing at the time of opening the amusement park is executed. For example, the display CPU 101 initializes today's game history, stores the already accumulated game history as the game history of the previous day, and stores the game history already stored as the game history of the previous day (one day ago) before the previous day. The game history is updated, such as by deferring and storing the game history as the game history before the day (2 days ago). It should be noted that such update of the game history may be performed based on the update request operation performed by the clerk of the game hall, or may be automatically performed when the power is turned on. ..

Next, the display CPU 101 checks the signal input from the pachislot gaming machine 2b (more specifically, the external relay terminal plate 217) and its change (S111). That is, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the state of the pachislot gaming machine 2b has changed.

Next, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the gaming section in the pachislot gaming machine 2b is an advantageous section (S112). That is, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the advantageous section signal is input from the pachislot gaming machine 2b. When the display CPU 101 determines in S112 that the gaming section in the pachislot gaming machine 2b is an advantageous section (that is, the advantageous section signal is input), the display CPU 101 shifts the processing to S113. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming section in the pachislot gaming machine 2b is not an advantageous section (that is, the advantageous section signal is not input), the process is transferred to S121.

In S113, the display CPU 101 executes various counter update processes during the advantageous section (S113). Here, in the storage means (for example, the above-mentioned display RAM 103 and the above-mentioned RAMF10252) in the game display device 1, in order to appropriately display information about the game to the player, for example, the following counters are provided. Therefore, the values of these counters are updated in response to various signals from the pachislot machine 2b. Hereinafter, it will be described as a counter provided in the display RAM 103.

(Game counter)
The game number counter is a counter that counts the number of games played today (the business day of the amusement park) (the cumulative number of games described above, the current number of games described later). For example, the display CPU 101 performs a process of adding "1" to the game number counter when a medal insertion signal for three pulses (that is, indicating that three medals have been inserted) is input. As a result, the number of games played when the game state is the normal game state is counted regardless of whether the game section is an advantageous section or a normal section. The display CPU 101 has the number of games when the medal insertion signal is input, regardless of the number of pulses in the medal insertion signal (that is, the number of inserted medals), except when the bonus signal is input. The process of adding "1" to the counter may be performed. That is, other methods can be used as long as the number of games played when the gaming state of the pachislot gaming machine 2b is a gaming state other than the special gaming state (BB gaming state) can be counted. However, even if the method of counting the number of games played today (the business day of the game hall) is used, including the number of games played when the game state of the pachislot machine 2b is the special game state (BB game state). Good.

(IN / OUT counter)
The IN / OUT counter is a counter that counts the number of medals inserted / paid out today (the business day of the amusement park). For example, when a medal insertion signal is input, the display CPU 101 performs a process of adding an IN number counter according to the number of pulses in the medal insertion signal (that is, the number of inserted medals). Further, for example, when a medal payout signal is input, the display CPU 101 performs a process of adding an OUT number counter according to the number of pulses in the medal payout signal (that is, the number of medals paid out). As a result, the number of medals inserted into the pachislot machine 2b and the number of medals paid out from the pachislot machine 2b are counted today (the business day of the amusement machine). For example, the IN number / OUT number counter may be configured as one counter. In this case, the counter is subtracted (or added) according to the number of pulses in the medal insertion signal (that is, the number of medals inserted), and added (or subtracted) according to the number of pulses in the medal payout signal (that is, the number of medals paid out). ) May be performed. Further, the IN number / OUT number counter may be used together with the advantageous section acquisition number counter described later, or the value of the advantageous section acquisition number counter described later is calculated from the count value of the IN number / OUT number counter. You may try to do it.

(Bonus count counter)
The bonus number counter is a counter that counts the number of bonuses (the number of BBs and RBs described above, and the number of BBs described later) as of today (the business day of the amusement park). When the input of the bonus signal is newly started, the process of adding "1" to the bonus count counter is performed. If the pachislot machine 2b is designed so that the bonus signal is output during one game or only for a predetermined period, the bonus count counter is set to "" based on the input of the bonus signal. 1 ”The addition process may be performed.

(Advantageous section count counter)
The advantageous section number counter is a counter that counts the number of advantageous sections (the number of advantageous sections described later) as of today (the business day of the amusement park). When the input of the advantageous section signal is newly started, the process of adding "1" to the advantageous section number counter is performed. In the pachislot game machine 2b, if the advantageous section signal is output during one game or only for a predetermined period (output only once), the advantageous section signal is input. Based on this, the process of adding "1" to the advantageous section count counter may be performed.

(Advantageous section counter)
The advantageous section counter is a counter that counts the number of games played in the advantageous section (the cumulative number of games in the advantageous section described later) when the gaming section of the pachislot gaming machine 2b is an advantageous section. For example, when the advantageous section signal is input and the medal insertion signal is input, the display CPU 101 has an advantageous section counter regardless of the number of pulses in the medal insertion signal (that is, the number of inserted medals). Is added by "1". Here, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example, the number of input sheets may differ between the special gaming state (BB gaming state) and the normal gaming state, but according to this advantageous section counter, in the advantageous section. If there is, it can be counted as the number of games played in the advantageous section regardless of whether the game state is the special game state (BB game state) or the normal game state. Then, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example, the advantageous section continues "1500" times regardless of whether the gaming state is the special gaming state (BB gaming state) or the normal gaming state. Therefore, by displaying according to the value of the advantageous section counter, it is possible to display the advantageous section in conjunction with the connected pachislot gaming machine 2b.

(Counter for the number of advantageous sections acquired)
The advantageous section acquisition number counter is a counter that counts the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section (total number of advantageous sections acquired, which will be described later) when the gaming section of the pachislot gaming machine 2b is an advantageous section. For example, when the advantageous section signal is input and the medal insertion signal is input, the display CPU 101 acquires the advantageous section for the number of pulses in the medal insertion signal (that is, the number of inserted medals). When the medal payout signal is input by subtracting the number counter, the process of adding the advantageous section acquisition number counter for the number of pulses in the medal payout signal (that is, the number of medals paid out) is performed. As a result, the number of acquired game media (medals) (that is, the difference number and the net increase number) when the game section is an advantageous section is counted. The advantageous section acquisition number counter may simply add the number of medals paid out without subtracting the number of medals inserted.

In addition, the value of the advantageous section acquisition number counter (the value of the total number of advantageous section acquisitions displayed to the player, which will be described later) and the actual acquisition number (that is, the difference number and the net increase number) must always be exactly the same. However, for example, the display CPU 101 counters the number of acquired advantageous sections so that the value of the total number of acquired advantageous sections, which will be described later, can be more useful information for the player, or in order to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. By performing a predetermined correction process on the value of, the value of the total number of acquired advantageous sections, which will be described later, may be displayed.

For example, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the first specification example, when the advantageous section is started after passing through the standby section, even if the advantageous section signal is input, the advantageous section is substantially set. It may not have been started. In this case, the medal acquisition status in the waiting section (in the waiting section, it is often a negative value because neither the notification of the stop operation procedure advantageous to the player nor the BB game state has been started). It may not be reflected in the value of the total number of acquired advantageous sections, which will be described later (that is, it is not counted as the value of the number of acquired advantageous sections counter).

Specifically, even if the display CPU 101 determines in S112 that the gaming section of the pachislot gaming machine 2b is an advantageous section, the display CPU 101 is within a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) after the advantageous section is started. If this is the case, in S113, the update process of the advantageous section acquisition number counter is suspended (temporarily counted, but not officially updated as the value of the advantageous section acquisition number counter), and the predetermined number of games (for example, is not updated). If the bonus signal is input within 5 games), it is judged that the period was the waiting section, and the number of medals held (tentatively counted) during that period is determined by the advantageous section acquisition number counter. Update the advantageous section acquisition number counter so that it is not counted as a value. On the other hand, if the bonus signal is not input within the predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games), it is determined that the period was not the waiting section, and the number of medals held (tentatively counted) during that period is determined. , Update the advantageous section acquisition number counter so that it is counted as the value of the advantageous section acquisition number counter (retroactively).

Further, in this case, when the display CPU 101 is within a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) after the advantageous section is started, the display CPU 101 uses a provisional counting counter different from the advantageous section acquisition number counter to obtain the medals in that period. When the number of acquisitions is counted and the bonus intermediate signal is input within the predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) and it is determined that the period is the waiting section, the value of the provisional counting counter (that is, the acquisition of the medal in the waiting section). If the number) is a positive value (ie, the counting result indicates an increase in medals), the number of advantageous sections acquired so that the value is counted (backward) as the value of the advantageous section acquisition counter. Update the counter, and if the counting result is a negative value (that is, the counting result indicates a decrease in medals), update the advantageous section acquisition number counter so that the value is not counted as the value of the advantageous section acquisition number counter. .. In this case, the initial value (0) may be displayed as the total number of advantageous sections acquired, which will be described later.

Further, in this case, if it is determined that the bonus intermediate signal is not input within the predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) and the period is not the waiting section, the value of the provisional counting counter (that is, the medal in the waiting section). Update the advantageous section acquisition number counter so that the value (retroactively) is counted as the value of the advantageous section acquisition number counter regardless of whether the value) is a positive value or a negative value. Alternatively, the same processing as in the case where it is determined that the waiting section has been described above may be performed.

As described above, as a method of counting the number of medals acquired when the number of advantageous sections is within a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) after the advantageous section is started, the update process of the advantageous section acquisition number counter is suspended (advantageous). The method of tentatively counting as a section acquisition number counter) and the method of using a tentative counting counter are described as examples, but the method is not limited to these. For example, the counting may be performed based on the counting result of the IN number / OUT number counter described above.

Further, as a method of determining whether or not the advantageous section in the pachislot game machine 2b is started after passing through the standby section, as described above, the bonus in-game signal is input within a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games). Although the method of determining whether or not it is present is explained as an example, the method is not limited to this. For example, if the number of medals acquired during a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) is a negative value, it is determined that the period is a waiting section, and if it is a positive value, it is determined that the period is not a waiting section. You may try to do it. Further, for example, if a signal during RT indicating that a specific RT gaming state (for example, high RT gaming state (RT1)) is not input within a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games), the period is a standby section. If an RT signal indicating that the player is in a specific RT game state (for example, high RT game state (RT1)) is input, it may be determined that the period is not a standby section.

As described above, the display CPU 101 performs a process of appropriately updating the above-mentioned various counters in S113 as described above. The various counters described above are shown as an example, and the game display device 1 can be further provided with other counters necessary for displaying information. It is also possible to provide only a part of the various counters described above.

Next, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the advantageous section counter is "1500" (S114). That is, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the game in the advantageous section has been digested 1500 times in the pachislot game machine 2b. When the display CPU 101 determines in S114 that the advantageous section counter is "1500" (that is, the game in the advantageous section has been digested 1500 times), the display CPU 101 shifts the process to S115. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section counter is not "1500" (that is, the game in the advantageous section has not been digested 1500 times), the process is transferred to S116.

In S115, the display CPU 101 executes the advantageous section end display process (S115). In this advantageous section end display process, the display CPU 101 performs, for example, a process for notifying the player that the advantageous section ends. As a result, the game display device 1 displays information such as an image indicating that the advantageous section ends, and notifies the end of the advantageous section. Further, the display CPU 101 updates today's game history based on the values of the advantageous section counter and the advantageous section acquisition number counter, and then performs a process of initializing (clearing 0) the values of these counters. The display CPU 101 returns to the process of S111 after executing the process of S115.

In S116, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the advantageous section counter is "1495" or more (S116). That is, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the game in the advantageous section has been digested 1495 times or more in the pachislot game machine 2b. When the display CPU 101 determines in S116 that the advantageous section counter is "1495" or more (that is, the game in the advantageous section has been digested 1495 times or more), the display CPU 101 shifts the process to S117. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section counter is not "1495" or more (that is, the game in the advantageous section has not been digested 1495 times or more), the process is transferred to S118.

In S117, the display CPU 101 executes the advantageous section countdown display process (S117). In this advantageous section countdown display process, the display CPU 101 performs, for example, a process for notifying the player that the advantageous section is about to end. Specifically, for example, when the advantageous section counter is "1495", the display CPU 101 performs a process for notifying the player that the advantageous section ends in the remaining 5 games. Then, each time the advantageous section counter is added by "1", the number of remaining games to be notified is sequentially reduced. As a result, the game display device 1 displays information such as an image showing the number of remaining games in the advantageous section, and notifies the end of the advantageous section. After executing the process of S117, the display CPU 101 shifts the process to S118.

In S118, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the gaming state in the pachislot gaming machine 2b is in the bonus (BB gaming state) (S118). That is, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the bonus signal is input from the pachislot gaming machine 2b. When the display CPU 101 determines in S118 that the gaming state in the pachislot gaming machine 2b is in the bonus (BB gaming state) (that is, the bonus in-game signal is input), the display CPU 101 shifts the process to S119. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state of the pachislot gaming machine 2b is not in the bonus (BB gaming state) (that is, the bonus signal is not input), the process is transferred to S120.

In S119, the display CPU 101 executes the third state display process (S119). In this third state display process, the display CPU 101 performs a process for notifying the player that, for example, the player is in the advantageous section and is in the special gaming state (BB gaming state). As a result, the game display device 1 displays information such as an image indicating that the current state is an advantageous section and a special game state (third state). As the display of the third state, for example, the effect display having the highest visual effect may be performed together with the characters such as "Advantageous section continuing! Bonus GET !!". Further, if the advantageous section is performed "1500" times and the advantageous section ends while the display of the third state is being performed, the display is switched from the third display to the second display ( (See S123 described later), in this case, the third display may be continued until the end of the special gaming state (BB gaming state). The display CPU 101 returns to the process of S111 after executing the process of S119.

In S120, the display CPU 101 executes the first state display process (S120). In this first state display process, the display CPU 101 performs, for example, a process for notifying the player that the section is in the advantageous section. As a result, the game display device 1 displays information such as an image indicating that the current state is an advantageous section (first state). As the display of the first state, for example, an effect display having a relatively lower visual effect than that of the third state may be performed together with a character such as "advantageous section is continuing!". The display CPU 101 returns to the process of S111 after executing the process of S120.

In S121, the display CPU 101 executes various counter update processes during the normal section (S121). In the various counter update processes during the normal section, the display CPU 101 performs a process of appropriately updating counters such as the above-mentioned game number counter, IN / OUT number counter, and bonus number counter, as in the process in S113.

Next, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the gaming state in the pachislot gaming machine 2b is in the bonus (BB gaming state) (S122). That is, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the bonus signal is input from the pachislot gaming machine 2b. When the display CPU 101 determines in S122 that the gaming state in the pachislot gaming machine 2b is in the bonus (BB gaming state) (that is, the bonus in-game signal is input), the display CPU 101 shifts the process to S123. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state in the pachislot gaming machine 2b is not in the bonus (BB gaming state) (that is, the bonus signal is not input), the process is transferred to S124.

In S123, the display CPU 101 executes the second state display process (S123). In this second state display process, the display CPU 101 performs a process for notifying the player that the player is in the special game state (BB game state), for example. As a result, the game display device 1 displays information such as an image indicating that the current state is the special game state (second state). As the display of the second state, for example, an effect display having a relatively lower visual effect than that of the third state may be performed together with characters such as "bonus GET !!". The display CPU 101 returns to the process of S111 after executing the process of S123.

In S124, the display CPU 101 executes the normal state display process (S124). In this normal state display process, the display CPU 101 performs a process for notifying the player that the player is not in the advantageous section and is not in the special game state (BB game state), for example. However, it is not positively notified that the normal game state is in the normal section, but the game display device 1 displays information such as an image showing the basic screen (initial screen). The display CPU 101 returns to the process of S111 after executing the process of S124.

As described above, according to the game display device 1 of this example, the first state is displayed when the game is in the advantageous section and not in the special game state, and when the game is in the special game state instead of in the advantageous section. , The second state is displayed, and when the advantageous section is in the special gaming state, the third state is displayed. Therefore, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, even when a plurality of advantageous gaming states are managed as a series of advantageous sections, the information desired by the player can be notified as appropriately as possible.

Further, according to the game display device 1 of this example, when the player is in the advantageous section, the number of games played in the advantageous section is counted regardless of whether or not the player is in the special game state, and the number of games in the advantageous section is counted. The number of acquired game media is also counted, and the display is performed according to the counting result. Therefore, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, even when a plurality of advantageous gaming states are managed as a series of advantageous sections, the status of the game in the advantageous section can be appropriately notified.

Further, according to the game display device 1 of this example, when a specific display start condition associated with the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, information indicating the remaining number of games of the advantageous section or the advantageous section is provided. Information indicating the end is notified. Therefore, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, even when a plurality of advantageous gaming states are managed as a series of advantageous sections, it is possible to appropriately notify information regarding the end of the advantageous section.

Further, according to the game display device 1 of this example, when the player is in the advantageous section, the number of games played in the advantageous section is counted regardless of whether or not the player is in the special game state, and the player is in the normal game state. In this case, the number of games played in the normal game state is counted regardless of whether or not the player is in the advantageous section. Then, when the player is in the advantageous section, the number of games played in the advantageous section is counted regardless of the number of game media inserted in the unit game, and when the game is in the normal game state, the game medium is input in the unit game. When the number of sheets is a predetermined number (for example, 3 sheets), the number of games played in the normal game state is counted. Therefore, the number of games played in the advantageous section of the pachislot machine 2b can be appropriately grasped, the number of games played in the normal gaming state of the pachislot machine 2b can be appropriately grasped, and the information on the number of games is appropriately notified. can do.

Further, according to the game display device 1 of this example, when the advantageous section in the pachislot game machine 2b starts after passing through a predetermined standby section, the number of acquired game media in the predetermined standby section is advantageous. It is not counted as the number of acquired game media in the section. Therefore, even when the pachislot gaming machine 2b has a waiting period in the advantageous section, it is possible to appropriately notify the information regarding the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section.

Further, in this case, if the number of acquired game media is increased in the predetermined waiting section, it is counted retroactively as the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section, and the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section including it is counted retroactively. If the number of acquired game media is decreasing, a predetermined initial value may be displayed as the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section when the advantageous section is actually started. As a result, not only the information regarding the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section can be displayed more appropriately, but also the display can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Second example of main control processing of game display device 1>
Next, a second example of the main control process of the game display device 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 53. In this second example, when the pachislot game machine 2b decides to start the advantageous section, the advantageous section signal is transmitted only for a predetermined period (for example, during one game or a predetermined output period). Output (that is, the start of the advantageous section can be recognized by the game display device 1 side, but the fact that the advantageous section is in progress and the end of the advantageous section can be recognized by the game display device 1 side. The case (which is impossible) will be described as an example. The description of the processing having the same contents as that of the first example is omitted.

First, the display CPU 101 executes the power-on processing in the same manner as in S110 of the first example described above (S130). Next, the display CPU 101 checks the input signal and its change, as in S111 of the first example described above (S131).

Next, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the flag during the advantageous section is on (S132). The advantageous section flag is identification information that is turned on when an advantageous section signal is input from the pachislot gaming machine 2b in S144 and S145, which will be described later. That is, whether or not the display CPU 101 determines whether the gaming section of the pachislot gaming machine 2b is an advantageous section (more specifically, whether or not the display CPU 101 determines that the gaming section of the pachislot gaming machine 2b is an advantageous section. ) Is judged. When the display CPU 101 determines in S132 that the flag in the advantageous section is on, the display CPU 101 shifts the process to S133. On the other hand, if it is determined that the flag in the advantageous section is not on, the process is transferred to S143.

In S133, the display CPU 101 executes various counter update processes during the advantageous section as in S113 of the first example described above (S133). Next, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the advantageous section end possible flag is on (S134). The advantageous section end possible flag is turned on when a medal payout signal (for 9 pulses) indicating that the number of medals to be paid out is "9" is input from the pachislot gaming machine 2b in S141 and S142 described later. It is the identification information to be performed. The description of the advantageous section end possible flag will be described later. When the display CPU 101 determines in S134 that the advantageous section end possible flag is on, the display CPU 101 shifts the process to S135. On the other hand, if it is determined that the advantageous section end possible flag is not on, the process is transferred to S141.

In S135, the display CPU 101 executes the advantageous section end determination process (S135). In this example, as described above, since the display CPU 101 cannot recognize the end of the advantageous section depending on the signal input from the pachislot game machine 2b, the advantageous section in the pachislot game machine 2b ends independently. It is decided whether or not (whether it can be regarded as finished) or not. Specifically, in the display CPU 101, when the flag during the advantageous section is on, the number of medals to be paid out during a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) is a predetermined threshold value (for example, the number of payouts with respect to the number of inserted games). It is judged whether or not the ratio (ball output rate) is less than "1" (100%)), and if it is judged that it is lower than the predetermined threshold value, it is judged that the advantageous section is completed and the predetermined threshold value is set. If it is judged that the value does not fall below the limit, it is judged that the advantageous section has not ended.

The method by which the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the advantageous section in the pachislot game machine 2b has ended (whether it can be regarded as having ended) is not limited to this. For example, the number of times that the medal insertion signal is input but the medal withdrawal signal is not input (that is, it can be identified that the pachislot machine 2b is lost) is continuously or within a predetermined period (for example, a predetermined number of times). If it is 3 times or more, it may be determined that the advantageous section has ended, and if it is less than the predetermined number of times, it may be determined that the advantageous section has not ended.

Further, for example, a medal insertion signal is input, and a medal payout signal (for 3 pulses) indicating that the number of medals to be paid out is "3" is input (that is, a replay can be established on the pachislot machine 2b). If the number of times (which can be identified as high) is less than the predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) continuously or within the predetermined period, it is judged that the advantageous section has ended, and the number of times is equal to or more than the predetermined number of times. If, it may be determined that the advantageous section has not ended.

Further, for example, if the number of times the medal payout signal is input within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times), it is determined that the advantageous section has ended, and the number of times is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times. In that case, it may be determined that the advantageous section has not ended.

Further, for example, when the value of the above-mentioned advantageous section acquisition number counter decreases by a predetermined number (for example, 15 sheets) or more within a predetermined period, it is determined that the advantageous section has ended, and the value decreases by the predetermined number or more. If not, it may be determined that the advantageous section has not ended.

Next, the display CPU 101 determines in the advantageous section end determination process of S135 whether or not it is determined that the advantageous section has ended (S136). When the display CPU 101 determines in S136 that the advantageous section has ended, the display CPU 101 shifts the process to S137. On the other hand, if it is determined that the advantageous section has not ended, the process is transferred to S139.

In S137, the display CPU 101 executes the advantageous section end display process (S137) in the same manner as in S115 of the first example described above. Next, the display CPU 101 turns off the flag in the advantageous section that was turned on, and turns off the flag that can end the advantageous section that was turned on (S138). The display CPU 101 returns to the process of S131 after executing the process of S138.

In S139, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the advantageous section counter exceeds "1500" and is a predetermined value (for example, "1550") (S139). In the pachislot machine 2b according to the first specification example, one advantageous section is supposed to end in "1500" times of games. Therefore, basically, it should be determined that the advantageous section has been completed by the time the advantageous section counter reaches the predetermined value described above (see S135). However, if it is not determined that the advantageous section has ended even if the advantageous section counter reaches the predetermined value described above, the connection between the game display device 1 side or the game display device 1 and the pachislot game machine 2b. There may be something wrong with the line. In addition, there is a possibility that some kind of trouble has occurred on the pachislot gaming machine 2b side, or that cheating has been performed. Therefore, the display CPU 101 performs special processing when the advantageous section counter exceeds "1500" and reaches a certain threshold value (predetermined value described above).

In S139, when the display CPU 101 determines that the advantageous section counter exceeds "1500" and is the predetermined value described above, the display CPU 101 shifts the processing to S140. On the other hand, if the advantageous section counter exceeds "1500" and it is not determined that the value is the predetermined value described above, the process returns to S131. The predetermined value described above can be appropriately set according to the specifications of the connected gaming machine. Further, the above-mentioned predetermined value may be set on the playground side. In this way, it is possible to determine on what basis the possibility of occurrence of a defect or fraudulent activity is determined in accordance with the policy of the amusement park side.

In S140, the display CPU 101 executes an error display process as an example of the above-mentioned special process (S140). In this error display process, the display CPU 101 performs a process for notifying, for example, that some trouble has occurred at the end of the advantageous section or that a fraudulent act may have been performed. As a result, the game display device 1 displays special information such as an image indicating that an abnormality (error) has occurred. As the error display, for example, an effect display that makes it possible to recognize the error state may be performed together with characters such as "The end of the advantageous section cannot be confirmed. Please call a staff member." However, it is possible to forcibly return to the basic screen (initial screen) without actively displaying the error. In this case, the game display device 1 should be made to transmit predetermined information to the server device 4 or the like so that at least the game hall can recognize the possibility of a malfunction or fraudulent activity. Just do it. The display CPU 101 returns to the process of S131 after executing the process of S140.

In S141, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not a medal payout signal indicating that a specific number of medals (9 in this example) have been paid out has been input (S141). When the display CPU 101 determines in S141 that the medal payout signal indicating that the above-mentioned specific number of medals have been paid out has been input, the display CPU 101 shifts the process to S142. On the other hand, when it is determined that the medal payout signal indicating that the above-mentioned specific number of medals have been paid out has not been input, the process returns to the process of S131.

In S142, the display CPU 101 turns on the advantageous section end possible flag (S142). Here, when nine medals are paid out in the pachislot game machine 2b according to the first specification example, it is highly possible that the player is notified of the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player (Fig.). (See 47), when the display CPU 101 recognizes that nine medals have been paid out in the pachislot game machine 2b at least once in the advantageous section, the display CPU 101 notifies the player of the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player. By turning on the advantageous section end possible flag on the assumption that it has been lost, the game display device 1 is controlled to a state in which the display of the specific state corresponding to the advantageous section can be ended. The advantageous section end possible flag is set when the number of times it is determined in S141 that the medal payout signal indicating that the above-mentioned specific number of medals have been paid out has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, three times). It may be turned on. The display CPU 101 returns to the process of S131 after executing the process of S142.

In S143, the display CPU 101 executes various counter update processes during the normal section as in S121 of the first example described above (S143). Next, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the advantageous section signal has been input (S144). When the display CPU 101 determines that the advantageous section signal has been input, the display CPU 101 turns on the advantageous section flag (S145). Further, in this process, the display of the specific state corresponding to the advantageous section is started. As the display of the specific state, for example, the effect display having a relatively high visual effect may be performed together with the characters such as "Advantageous section is continuing!". The display CPU 101 returns to the process of S131 after executing the process of S145. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section signal has not been input, the process returns to the process of S131.

As described above, according to the game display device 1 of this example, when a specific number of game media are paid out during the advantageous section, the display of the specific state corresponding to the advantageous section can be terminated. , When it is determined that the advantageous section has been completed, the display of the specific state is terminated if the display of the specific state can be terminated. Therefore, even if the game display device 1 cannot clearly recognize the end of the advantageous section in the pachislot game machine 2b, it is possible to prevent the display contents from being inconsistent as much as possible. ..

Further, according to the game display device 1 of this example, special information is displayed when the counting result of the number of games in the advantageous section reaches a specific number of games without determining that the advantageous section has ended. It is designed to do. Therefore, even if the game display device 1 cannot clearly recognize the end of the advantageous section in the pachislot game machine 2b, it is possible to prevent the display contents from being inconsistent as much as possible. Furthermore, the game hall can accurately recognize the possibility of a defect or fraudulent activity.

[Example of timing chart of each control process when the game display device (game device) according to the first to ninth embodiments and the game machine according to the first specification example are connected]
Next, an example of a timing chart of each control process when the game display device (game device) according to the first to ninth embodiments described above and the game machine according to the first specification example described above are connected. Will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55.

<First example of the timing chart of the control processing between the game display device 1 and the pachislot game machine 2b according to the first specification example>
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a first example of a timing chart of control processing when the above-mentioned game display device 1 and the above-mentioned pachislot game machine 2b according to the first specification example are connected, and is more specific. Is a diagram showing a timing chart corresponding to a part of the first example of the main control process of the game display device 1 described with reference to FIG. 52.

In this example, for example, on the previous day (one day before), the number of games played when the game hall is closed is "500" (in the above-mentioned power-on processing, the game history is updated and stored for the previous day). Today, the number of BBs is "0" (bonus number counter = 0), the number of advantageous sections is "0" (advantageous section number counter = 0), and the current number of games is "0" (game number counter = 0). ) Is initialized (that is, the state immediately after the game hall is opened) to describe the case where the game is started. The display contents of today's game history will be described later with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58.

First, at the time of "t1" (for example, the current number of games is "150"), the above-mentioned advantageous section start condition (for example, advantageous section start condition A) is satisfied in the pachislot game machine 2b, and the game section starts from the normal section. Based on the transition to the advantageous section, the output of the advantageous section signal is started. When the input of the advantageous section signal is started, the game display device 1 starts displaying the first state indicating that the advantageous section is in progress. Further, the game display device 1 adds "1" to the advantageous section number counter. Further, the game display device 1 starts counting the number of games in the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter and counting the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquisition number counter.

Next, at the time of "t2" (for example, the current number of games is "155" and the cumulative number of advantageous section games is "5"), the above-mentioned ascending replay is established in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, and the RT gaming state is low RT. Based on the transition from the gaming state (RT0) to the high RT gaming state (RT1), the output of the RT in-game signal is started. The game display device 1 does not make any particular control change even when the input of the signal during RT is started. However, from this point on, counting of the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquisition number counter may be started. Further, a part of the display of the first state may be changed from this point. For example, at the time of "t1" described above, it is displayed that the advantageous section, which is the game section in which the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, has started (being in the advantageous section), and this " At the time of "t2", it may be displayed that the gaming state in the advantageous section has become a specific RT gaming state.

Next, at the time of "t3" (for example, the current number of games is "300" and the cumulative number of games in the advantageous section is "150"), the above-mentioned BB is established in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, and the gaming state is the normal gaming state (for example). Based on the transition from the bonus internal winning (RT2)) to the BB game state, the output of the bonus in-game signal is started. When the input of the bonus signal is started, the game display device 1 ends the display of the first state and starts the display of the third state indicating that the player is in the advantageous section and is in the bonus. Further, the game display device 1 adds "1" to the bonus number counter. Further, the game display device 1 continues to count the number of games played in the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter and the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquisition number counter, but the number of games played by the game number counter. Count is interrupted. In this example, the BB game state basically ends in "25" games, and "200" medals are obtained (2 medals inserted → 10 medals). Payout x 25 games will pay out more than 240 medals).

Next, at the time of "t4" (for example, the current number of games is "300" and the cumulative number of games in the advantageous section is "175"), the above-mentioned BB is completed and the game state is changed from the BB game state in the pachislot game machine 2b. Based on the transition to the normal gaming state (low RT gaming state (RT0)), the output of the bonus in-game signal is terminated. When the input of the bonus signal is completed, the game display device 1 ends the display of the third state and starts the display of the first state. Further, the game display device 1 restarts the counting of the number of games by the game counter. It should be noted that the game display device 1 counts the number of medals acquired in the special game state (BB game state) separately from the total number of medals acquired in the advantageous section (counter for the number of acquired advantageous sections) at this time. It is desirable to do.

Next, at the time of "t5" (for example, the current number of games is "1625" and the cumulative number of advantageous section games is "1500"), the above-mentioned advantageous section end condition is satisfied in the pachislot game machine 2b, and the game section is advantageous. The output of the advantageous section signal is terminated based on the transition from the section to the normal section. The game display device 1 ends the display of the first state when the input of the advantageous section signal is completed, and starts the display of the second state if the bonus is in progress (if the bonus signal is output). Then, if the bonus is not in progress (if the bonus signal is not output), the display of the normal state is started. Further, the game display device 1 finishes counting the number of games played in the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter and counting the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquisition number counter, and counts the count results by these counters. It is stored as a game history, and the counting results by these counters are initialized (cleared to 0).

It should be noted that the value of the advantageous section counter and the value of the cumulative number of advantageous section games actually displayed to the player do not necessarily have to be exactly the same. For example, the actual value of the advantageous section counter is "1500" or "1498". However, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58 described later, the cumulative number of games in the advantageous section includes the number of games played in the BB game state (for example, "25", as in the value of the current number of games (game number counter). ”) May be not included, and the values“ 1475 ”and“ 1473 ”may be displayed.

Next, at the time of "t6" (for example, the current number of games is "1630"), the above-mentioned descending replay is established in the pachislot game machine 2b, and the RT game state is changed from the high RT game state (RT1) to the low RT game state. Based on the transition to (RT0), the output of the signal during RT is terminated. The game display device 1 does not make any particular control change even when the input of the signal during RT is completed. However, at this point, the counting of the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquisition number counter may be completed. As described above, the start time point and the end time point of counting of the various counters described above (particularly, the advantageous section counter and the advantageous section acquisition number counter) can be arbitrarily set. That is, as long as more appropriate information can be notified to the player, any of the above-mentioned "t1" to "t6" time points is the start time point or the end time point of the count according to the specifications of the connected game machine and the like. Can be adopted as.

Next, at the time of "t7" (for example, the number of games is currently "1725"), the above-mentioned BB is established in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, and the gaming state is changed from the normal gaming state (bonus internal winning (RT2)) to BB. Based on the transition to the gaming state, the output of the bonus in-game signal is started. When the input of the bonus signal is started, the game display device 1 ends the display of the normal state and starts the display of the second state indicating that the bonus is in progress. Further, the game display device 1 adds "1" to the bonus number counter. In addition, the counting of the number of games by the game counter is interrupted.

Next, at the time of "t8" (for example, the current number of games is "1725"), in the pachislot game machine 2b, the above-mentioned BB ends and the game state changes from the BB game state to the normal game state (low RT game state (RT0). )), The output of the bonus signal is terminated. When the input of the bonus signal is completed, the game display device 1 ends the display of the second state and starts the display of the normal state. Further, the game display device 1 restarts the counting of the number of games by the game counter. It is desirable that the game display device 1 also count the number of medals acquired in the special game state (BB game state) even at this point.

<Second example of the timing chart of the control processing between the game display device 1 and the pachislot game machine 2b according to the first specification example>
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a first example of a timing chart of control processing when the above-mentioned game display device 1 and the above-mentioned pachislot game machine 2b according to the first specification example are connected, and is more specific. Is a diagram showing a timing chart corresponding to a part of a second example of the main control process of the game display device 1 described with reference to FIG. 53.

First, at the time of "t-1", in the pachislot game machine 2b, the above-mentioned advantageous section start condition (for example, advantageous section start condition A) is satisfied, and the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section. , The output of the advantageous section signal is performed during one game or for a predetermined period (only once) (the output of the advantageous section signal is not continued during the advantageous section). When the advantageous section signal is input, the game display device 1 starts displaying the specific state (first state) corresponding to the advantageous section. Further, the game display device 1 adds "1" to the advantageous section number counter. Further, the game display device 1 starts counting the number of games in the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter and counting the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquisition number counter.

In the pachislot game machine 2b in this example, the game display device 1 is advantageous because the output of the advantageous section signal is performed during one game or for a predetermined period (only once). Although the start of the section can be recognized, the start of the advantageous section may be recognized by another method. For example, when the above-mentioned section display area (section display) is provided in the pachislot game machine 2b, an advantageous section detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the section display area (section display) is lit is displayed for gaming. Based on the fact that the pachislot game machine 2b detects that the above-mentioned section display area (section display) is lit at the time of “t-1”, the game display device 1 is provided in the device 1. The various control processes described above may be performed. As a result, even if the information indicating that the advantageous section has been started is not transmitted to the game display device 1 due to the specifications of the game machine, the game display device 1 connected to the game machine is appropriately advantageous. Information about the section can be displayed. Further, in this case, the above-mentioned advantageous section detection sensor may detect turning on and off of the above-mentioned section display area (section indicator). In this way, the game display device 1 can appropriately recognize not only the start of the advantageous section but also the end of the advantageous section even when the information regarding the advantageous section is not transmitted from the game machine. ..

Next, at the time of "t-2", the pachislot gaming machine 2b outputs a medal payout signal for three pulses based on the above-mentioned special small winning combination 2 being established and three medals being paid out. .. The game display device 1 does not make any particular control change even if the medal payout signals for three pulses are input. That is, it is determined that the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player has not been notified at least once in the advantageous section.

Next, at the time of "t-3", the pachislot gaming machine 2b outputs a medal payout signal for 9 pulses based on the establishment of the above-mentioned specific small winning combination and the payout of 9 medals. When the medal payout signal for 9 pulses is input, the game display device 1 makes it possible to end the display of the specific state (first state) corresponding to the advantageous section, so that the advantageous section ends. Turn on the possible flag. That is, it is considered that the notification of the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player has been performed at least once in the advantageous section.

Next, at the time of "t-4", when it is determined that the advantageous section has ended, the game display device 1 ends the display of the specific state (first state) corresponding to the advantageous section. Further, the game display device 1 turns off the advantageous section middle flag and the advantageous section end possible flag. Further, the game display device 1 finishes counting the number of games in the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter and counting the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquisition number counter, as in the first example. The counting results of these counters are stored as a game history, and the counting results of these counters are initialized (cleared to 0).

[Display screen of the game display device (game device) according to the first to ninth embodiments when the game machine of the first specification example is connected]
Next, with respect to the display screen of the game display device (game device) according to the first to ninth embodiments described above when the game machine according to the first specification example described above is connected, FIGS. 56 to 58. Will be described with reference to. FIG. 56 is an explanatory view showing a basic display screen of the above-mentioned game display device 1 when the pachislot game machine 2b of the first specification example described above is connected, and FIGS. 57 and 58 are the above-described first specifications. It is explanatory drawing which shows the history display screen of the said-mentioned game display device 1 when the pachislot game machine 2b of 1 specification example is connected. Note that FIGS. 56 to 58 describe an example in which various game information is displayed on the display surface (display unit) 1101.

As shown in FIG. 56, the display surface (display unit) 1101 of the game display device 1 has a basic display area 1101a for displaying game information such as an effect display, a detailed game history display, and a graph display, and today's display area 1101a. A history display area 1101d for displaying game information such as a game history (number of BBs, number of advantageous sections, number of current games) is provided. When the pachislot game machine 2b is in an advantageous section, the basic display area 1101a includes the number of games played in the advantageous section (cumulative number of games in the advantageous section) and the number of game media acquired in the advantageous section (total number of acquired games in the advantageous section). Advantageous section display areas 1101b and 1101c on which game information such as the above are displayed are provided.

In FIG. 56, in the history display area 1101d, "2" is displayed as the number of transitions to today's BB game state (value of the bonus number counter) in the "BB number of times" column, and the "advantageous section number of times" column. "1" is displayed as the number of transitions to today's advantageous section (value of the advantageous section number counter), and "500" is displayed as the number of games played today (value of the number of games counter) in the "current number of games" column. Has been done.

Here, as described above, the value of the game number counter may be displayed as it is in the "current number of games" column, or as shown in FIG. 57, the advantageous section or the BB game state is completed. The number of games played in the normal game state in the normal section from (that is, the number of games in which a relatively disadvantageous state continues) may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the value of the advantageous section counter may be displayed in the advantageous section. Further, in this case, as described above, the value obtained by subtracting the number of games played in the BB game state from the value of the advantageous section counter may be displayed. That is, the numerical value related to the number of games that the player most desires may be displayed according to the specifications of the connected game machine and the like. Further, which numerical value is displayed may be set by the player or the game hall side.

Further, in FIG. 57, as an example of a detailed game history in the basic display area 1101a, the number of games played when the game hall is closed the previous day (one day before) (advantageous section or normal game state after the BB game state ends). The number of games played) is "500" ("last day before"), the advantageous section starts in today's "150" game ("4 times ago"), and the "150" game starts after the advantageous section starts. The BB game state starts in the eyes (“3 times before”), and the advantageous section ends in the “1475” game after the advantageous section starts, except for the number of games in the BB game state (“25” games) (“1475” games). "Two times before"), the BB game state starts in the "100" game after the advantageous section ends ("one time ago"), and the normal game state of the normal section after the BB game state ends. It is displayed that the number of games played is the "200th" game ("current").

Further, in FIG. 57, in the basic display area 1101a, as an example of a detailed game history, the total number of advantageous sections acquired, which is the number of game media acquired in a series of advantageous sections (for example, the value of the advantageous section acquired number counter). Is displayed. That is, it is possible to confirm the history of how much game medium has been acquired in the previous series of advantageous sections even if it is not in the advantageous section. Further, in FIG. 57, as an example of a detailed game history, the number of acquired sheets (“acquired number”) in the BB game state is also displayed in the basic display area 1101a. Therefore, in the series of advantageous sections, it is possible to confirm the breakdown of the number of acquired sheets in the BB gaming state and the number of acquired sheets in the normal gaming state.

For example, in FIG. 57, the total number of advantageous sections acquired in the series of advantageous sections is displayed as "1725", the number of transitions to the BB gaming state in the series of advantageous sections is one, and the number of acquisitions is "250". (For example, the number of BB game states paid out in the first specification example. Here, the net increase in the number of BB game states in the first specification example may be displayed, in which case the number is "200". ) Is displayed, it can be confirmed that out of the total number of advantageous sections acquired in the series of advantageous sections of "1725", the number acquired in the normal gaming state is "1475".

Further, in FIG. 58, as an example of a detailed game history in the basic display area 1101a, the BB game state starts in the "400" game after the advantageous section or the BB game state ends on the previous day (one day before). ("Two times before the previous day"), the BB game state starts in the "300" game after the BB game state ends ("one time before the previous day"), and the game hall after the BB game state ends. The number of games played until the store closes is "500" ("last day before"), the advantageous section starts in today's "150" game ("two times before"), and after the advantageous section starts The BB game state starts in the "150" game ("one time ago"), and the game is the "1473" game after the advantageous section starts, excluding the number of games in the BB game state ("25" game). ("Current") is displayed.

Further, in FIG. 58, an advantageous section end display area 1101e is provided in the basic display area 1101a instead of the advantageous section display areas 1101b and 1101c, and the remaining number of games of the advantageous section is sequentially notified until the end of the advantageous section ( Advantageous section countdown display). The advantageous section end display area 1101e is displayed in the basic display area 1101a together with the advantageous section display areas 1101b and 1101c when the advantageous section countdown display is started even if the detailed game history is not displayed. You may. Further, it may be the advantageous section end display area 1101e or the basic display area 1101a that notifies the end of the advantageous section (performs the advantageous section end display).

[Example of a flowchart of a control process of a game display device (game device) according to the first to ninth embodiments when the game machine according to the second specification example is connected]
Next, FIG. 59 and FIG. 59 show an example of control processing of the game display device (game device) according to the first to ninth embodiments described above when the game machine according to the second specification example described above is connected. This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a third example of the main control process of the game display device 1 when the pachislot game machine 2b according to the second specification example described above is connected, and FIG. 60 is a diagram showing the third example described above. It is a figure which shows the 4th example of the main control processing of the game display device 1 when the pachislot game machine 2b which concerns on 2 specification examples is connected. As described above, the main processing of the game display device 1 is executed by the control means (for example, the display CPU 101 described above and the control circuit F10250 described above) that controls the display in the game display device 1. is there. Hereinafter, the processing performed by the display CPU 101 will be described.

<Third example of the main control process of the game display device 1>
First, a third example of the main control process of the game display device 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. In this third example, after the pachislot game machine 2b determines to start the advantageous section (first advantageous section or second advantageous section), the advantageous section (first advantageous section or second advantageous section) is set. Until it is decided to end, the advantageous section signal is continuously output (that is, the advantageous section is started, the advantageous section is in progress, and the advantageous section is ended on the game display device 1 side. (Can be recognized by), and during RT from the start of a specific RT gaming state (high RT gaming state (RT2)) to the end of a specific RT gaming state (high RT gaming state (RT2)). The game indicates that the signal is continuously output (that is, the high RT gaming state (RT2) is started, the high RT gaming state (RT2) is in progress, and the high RT gaming state (RT2) is terminated. A case (which can be recognized on the display device 1 side) will be described as an example.

In the third example, the first example described above, and the fourth example described later, various signals (for example, advantageous section signals and RT-in-RT signals) are displayed on the pachislot gaming machine 2b side as in the second example. ) Is not continuously output (or is not output in the first place), and the game display device 1 determines whether or not the advantageous section has started and / or whether or not the advantageous section has ended (for example,). By executing the advantageous section end determination process (see S135 in FIG. 53) or performing the determination using the advantageous section detection sensor), the advantageous section is started, the advantageous section is in progress, and the advantageous section is terminated. It is also possible to recognize that (or that a specific RT gaming state is started, that a specific RT gaming state is in progress, and that a specific RT gaming state is terminated).

First, the display CPU 101 executes the power-on processing in the same manner as in S110 of the first example described above (S150). Next, the display CPU 101 checks the input signal and its change in the same manner as in S111 of the first example described above (S151). Next, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the gaming section in the pachislot gaming machine 2b is an advantageous section, as in S112 of the first example described above (S152). When the display CPU 101 determines in S112 that the gaming section in the pachislot gaming machine 2b is an advantageous section, the display CPU 101 shifts the processing to S153. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming section of the pachislot gaming machine 2b is not an advantageous section, the process is transferred to S160.

In S153, the display CPU 101 executes various counter update processes during the advantageous section as in S113 of the first example described above (S153). In the third example and the fourth example described later, the display CPU 101 performs a process of adding "1" to the game number counter even when the game state is the specific game state (MB game state). That is, in the third example and the fourth example described later, the specific gaming state (MB gaming state) in the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example is treated as a part of the normal gaming state and counted as the number of games played. .. However, as in the first example described above, the number of games played in the specific game state (MB game state) may be excluded from the count target of the game number counter.

Further, in the third example and the fourth example described later, the display CPU 101 does not perform the process of adding "1" to the bonus number counter. This is because the pachi-slot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example does not output a bonus signal when a specific gaming state (MB gaming state) occurs. However, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example, for example, the bonus signal 1 is output when the MB1 gaming state occurs, and the bonus signal 2 is output when the MB2 gaming state occurs. In some cases, a process of adding "1" to the bonus count counter may be performed based on these signals. Further, in this case, since the first advantageous section is also generated at the same time when the MB1 gaming state occurs, the bonus number counter is not added by "1" when the MB1 gaming state occurs (the advantageous section number counter is "1". 1 "is added), and when the MB2 game state occurs, the bonus number counter may be added by" 1 ".

Further, in the third example and the fourth example described later, the display CPU 101 performs a process of adding "1" to the advantageous section number counter when the first advantageous section or the second advantageous section occurs. This is because the pachi-slot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example outputs the same advantageous section signal regardless of whether the first advantageous section or the second advantageous section occurs. is there. However, in the pachislot game machine 2b according to the second specification example, for example, the advantageous section signal 1 is output when the first advantageous section occurs, and the advantageous section signal 2 is output when the second advantageous section occurs. In the case of the above, if the advantageous section signal 1 is input, the first advantageous section number counter is added by "1", and if the advantageous section signal 2 is input, the second advantageous section number counter is added by "1". You may do it. In this case, in the history display area 1101d described above, the "number of occurrences of the first advantageous section", which is the number of occurrences of today's first advantageous section, and the "number of occurrences of the second advantageous section", which is the number of occurrences of the second advantageous section, are displayed. Should be displayed.

Further, in the third example and the fourth example described later, the display CPU 101 updates the IN number / OUT number counter, the advantageous section counter, and the advantageous section acquisition number counter as in the first example described above. However, unlike the first example described above, the advantageous section counter and the advantageous section acquisition number counter may be updated. For example, when the second advantageous section occurs, the advantageous section counter or the advantageous section counter or the advantageous section is started from the time when the state shifts to a specific RT gaming state (high RT gaming state (RT2)) (when the input of the signal during RT is started). The update of the section acquisition number counter may be started. Further, also in the third example and the fourth example described later, it is not necessary to always match the value of the advantageous section acquisition number counter with the display of the above-mentioned advantageous section acquisition number, and the display is performed so as to be more appropriate. The contents may be changed as appropriate. Specific examples will be described later.

Next, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the RT signal is on (S154). That is, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the gaming state of the pachislot gaming machine 2b is a specific RT gaming state (high RT gaming state (RT2)). When the display CPU 101 determines in S154 that the signal during RT is on, the display CPU 101 shifts the processing to S155. On the other hand, if it is determined that the RT signal is not on, the process is transferred to S159.

In S154, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the RT signal has been turned from off to on (S155). That is, the display CPU 101 had the RT during RT signal off at the time of the previous signal check (see S151), but turned on the RT during RT signal at the time of the current signal check (see S151) (that is, pachislot). It is determined whether or not the gaming state of the gaming machine 2b has shifted to a specific RT gaming state (high RT gaming state (RT2)). When the display CPU 101 determines in S155 that the RT signal has changed from off to on, the display CPU 101 shifts the process to S156. On the other hand, when it is determined that the RT signal is not turned on (remains turned on) from off, the process is transferred to S158.

In S156, the display CPU 101 executes a pseudo-bonus start display process (S156). In this pseudo-bonus start display process, the display CPU 101 is a process for notifying the player that a specific RT gaming state (high RT gaming state (RT2)) has started in the advantageous section (second advantageous section). I do. Here, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example, the most advantageous state for the player is when the gaming state is the high RT gaming state (RT2) in the advantageous section (second advantageous section). Therefore, in the game display device 1, this advantageous section (second advantageous section) and high RT gaming state (RT2) are defined as being in a pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus), which is the most advantageous. It is designed to notify that the state will start. That is, the game display device 1 displays information such as an image indicating that the pseudo-bonus starts, and notifies the start of the pseudo-bonus. In this case, for example, the effect display having the highest visual effect may be performed together with characters such as "Pseudo bonus start !!".

Next, the display CPU 101 executes the acquisition number display start process (S157). In this acquisition number display start processing, the display CPU 101 describes the number of medals acquired by the advantageous section acquisition number counter from the start of the advantageous section (second advantageous section) to the start of the high RT gaming state (RT2). The process for starting the display as the total number of acquired advantageous sections is performed. That is, in this example, since the advantageous section (second advantageous section) and the high RT gaming state (RT2) are defined as the pseudo bonus, the total acquisition of the advantageous section described above is performed at the start of the pseudo bonus. The display of the number of sheets is started. In this acquisition number display start process, not only the above-mentioned total number of acquired advantageous sections but also the above-mentioned cumulative number of advantageous sections may be displayed.

Further, the display CPU 101 is from the start of the advantageous section (second advantageous section) to the start of the high RT gaming state (RT2), as in the case where the advantageous section is started after the standby section in the first example described above. During the period of, the update process of the advantageous section acquisition number counter is suspended (temporarily counted, but it is not officially updated as the value of the advantageous section acquisition number counter), or it is provisionally different from the advantageous section acquisition number counter. The number of medals acquired during that period is counted by the counting counter, and the advantageous section acquisition number counter is updated so as to be counted as the value of the advantageous section acquisition number counter (retroactively) in this acquisition number display start processing. It may be. Further, in this case, if the number of medals acquired during that period is a positive value (that is, the counting result indicates an increase in medals), such processing is performed and a negative value (that is, counting) is performed. If the result indicates a decrease in medals), the advantageous section acquisition number counter is updated so that the value is not counted as the value of the advantageous section acquisition number counter, and the display is displayed in this acquisition number display start processing. The initial value (0) may be displayed as the total number of acquired advantageous sections described above to be started. The display CPU 101 returns to the process of S151 after executing the process of S157.

In S158, the display CPU 101 executes the third state display process (S158). In this third state display process, the display CPU 101 is, for example, in an advantageous section (second advantageous section) and further in a specific RT gaming state (high RT gaming state (RT2)) (that is, a pseudo bonus). The process for notifying the player of (being inside) is performed. As a result, the game display device 1 displays information such as an image indicating that the current state is a pseudo bonus. As the display of the third state, for example, the effect display having the highest visual effect may be performed together with the characters such as "Pseudo bonus is ongoing !!". The display CPU 101 returns to the process of S151 after executing the process of S158.

In S159, the display CPU 101 executes the first state display process (S159). In this first state display process, the display CPU 101 performs a process for notifying the player that the player is in the advantageous section (first advantageous section or second advantageous section), for example. As a result, the game display device 1 displays information such as an image indicating that the current state is an advantageous section (first state). As the display of the first state, for example, an effect display having a relatively lower visual effect than that of the third state may be performed together with a character such as "advantageous section is continuing!". Further, for example, different displays may be performed for the first advantageous section and the second advantageous section. The display CPU 101 returns to the process of S151 after executing the process of S159.

In S160, the display CPU 101 executes various counter update processes during the normal section (S160). In the various counter update processes during the normal section, the display CPU 101 performs a process of appropriately updating counters such as the above-mentioned game number counter, IN / OUT number counter, and bonus number counter, as in the process in S153.

Next, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the RT signal is on (S161). That is, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the gaming state of the pachislot gaming machine 2b is a specific RT gaming state (high RT gaming state (RT2)). When the display CPU 101 determines in S161 that the RT signal is on, the display CPU 101 shifts the process to S162. On the other hand, if it is determined that the RT signal is not on, the process is transferred to S163.

In S162, the display CPU 101 executes the second state display process (S162). In this second state display process, the display CPU 101 performs a process for notifying the player that the player is in a specific RT game state (high RT game state (RT2)), for example. As a result, the game display device 1 displays information such as an image indicating that the current state is a specific RT game state (high RT game state (RT2)). As the display of the second state, for example, an effect display having a relatively lower visual effect than that of the third state may be performed together with characters such as "High RT in progress!". If the gaming section is not an advantageous section, the above-mentioned descending replay and descending symbol are immediately established and the player shifts to the low RT gaming state (RT0). Therefore, when the gaming section is the normal section, the high RT gaming When the state (RT2) is entered, no special display (display of the second state) may be performed, and the same processing as the normal state display processing described later may be performed. The display CPU 101 returns to the process of S151 after executing the process of S162.

In S163, the display CPU 101 executes the normal state display process (S163). In this normal state display process, the display CPU 101 performs a process for notifying the player that the player is not in the advantageous section and is not in a specific RT game state (high RT game state (RT2)). .. However, it is not positively notified that the normal game state is in the normal section, but the game display device 1 displays information such as an image showing the basic screen (initial screen). The display CPU 101 returns to the process of S151 after executing the process of S163.

As described above, according to the game display device 1 of this example, the number of acquired game media is counted even in the advantageous section and not in the specific RT gaming state, and the specific RT is in the advantageous section. When the game is entered, the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section including this counting result is updated, and the updated result is displayed. Therefore, even when the timing at which the advantageous section is started and the timing at which the most advantageous state is started in the pachislot gaming machine 2b are different, the information regarding the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section is appropriately notified. be able to.

Further, in this case, when the advantageous section is in the specific RT gaming state, the predetermined state (first state) is displayed, and when the advantageous section is in the specific RT gaming state, the specific state is displayed. The state (third state) is displayed. As a result, even when the timing at which the advantageous section is started and the timing at which the most advantageous state is started in the pachislot gaming machine 2b are different, the information desired by the player is notified as appropriately as possible. Can be done.

<Fourth example of main control processing of game display device 1>
Next, a fourth example of the main control process of the game display device 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 60. In this fourth example, the mode of outputting the signal from the pachislot gaming machine 2b is basically the same as that of the third example described above.

First, the display CPU 101 executes the power-on processing in the same manner as in S150 of the third example described above (S170). Next, the display CPU 101 checks the input signal and its change in the same manner as in S151 of the third example described above (S171). Next, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the gaming section in the pachislot gaming machine 2b is an advantageous section, as in S152 of the third example described above (S172). When the display CPU 101 determines in S172 that the gaming section in the pachislot gaming machine 2b is an advantageous section, the display CPU 101 shifts the processing to S173. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming section of the pachislot gaming machine 2b is not an advantageous section, the process is transferred to S179.

In S173, the display CPU 101 executes various counter update processes during the advantageous section as in S153 of the third example described above (S173). Next, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the advantageous section counter is "3" (S174). When the display CPU 101 determines in S174 that the advantageous section counter is "3", the display CPU 101 shifts the processing to S175. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section counter is not "3", the process is transferred to S177.

In S175, the display CPU 101 executes the first state display start process (S175). In this first state display start process, the display CPU 101 performs, for example, a process for starting notifying the player that the started advantageous section is the second advantageous section. As a result, the game display device 1 displays information such as an image indicating that the current state is the second advantageous section (first state). Here, in the pachislot game machine 2b according to the second specification example, the first advantageous section (that is, the MB1 game state) basically ends in a maximum of two games, so that the display CPU 101 is advantageous. When the section continues for 3 games or more, the started advantageous section is regarded as the second advantageous section, and a notification to that effect is given. As the display of the first state (specific state), for example, an effect display having a relatively high visual effect may be performed together with characters such as "the second advantageous section is continuing!". In addition, the number of games played in the advantageous section (value of the advantageous section counter) at which the display of the first state is started in this first state display start process can be arbitrarily set and changed.

The maximum number of game media that can be acquired in the first advantageous section (that is, the MB1 game state) is "19" for the number of payouts and "13" for the number of acquisitions (net increase) (first game: Since 3 cards are inserted, 9 cards are paid out, and the second game: 3 cards are inserted and 10 cards are paid out), in S174, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the advantageous section acquisition number counter exceeds "13". If it is determined that the advantageous section acquisition number counter exceeds "13", the processing is transferred to S175, and if it is determined that the advantageous section acquisition number counter does not exceed "13", the processing is transferred to S177. It may be.

Next, the display CPU 101 executes the acquisition number display start process (S176). In this acquisition number display start processing, the display CPU 101 described above the number of medals acquired by the advantageous section acquisition number counter from the start of the advantageous section (second advantageous section) to the start of the display of the first state. Performs processing to start displaying as the total number of advantageous sections acquired. That is, in this example, when three games have passed since the start of the advantageous section, it is notified that the started advantageous section is the second advantageous section. The display of the number of sheets is started. In this acquisition number display start process, not only the above-mentioned total number of acquired advantageous sections but also the above-mentioned cumulative number of advantageous sections may be displayed.

Further, the display CPU 101 is from the start of the advantageous section (second advantageous section) to the start of the display of the first state, as in the case where the advantageous section is started after passing through the standby section in the first example described above. During the period, the update process of the advantageous section acquisition number counter is suspended (temporarily counted, but it is not officially updated as the value of the advantageous section acquisition number counter), or a provisional count different from the advantageous section acquisition number counter. The number of medals acquired during that period is counted by the counter, and the advantageous section acquisition number counter is updated so as to be counted as the value of the advantageous section acquisition number counter (retroactively) in this acquisition number display start processing. You may. Further, in this case, if the number of medals acquired during that period is a positive value (that is, the counting result indicates an increase in medals), such processing is performed and a negative value (that is, counting) is performed. If the result indicates a decrease in medals), the advantageous section acquisition number counter is updated so that the value is not counted as the value of the advantageous section acquisition number counter, and the display is displayed in this acquisition number display start processing. The initial value (0) may be displayed as the total number of acquired advantageous sections described above to be started. The display CPU 101 returns to the process of S171 after executing the process of S176.

In S177, the display CPU 101 determines whether or not the display of the first state has been started (S177). In S177, when the display CPU 101 determines that the display of the first state has been started, the display CPU 101 shifts the process to S178. On the other hand, when it is determined that the display of the first state has not been started, the process returns to the process of S171. When the display of the first state is not started during the advantageous section, the display of the normal state described later may be performed, or at least the display of the predetermined state for notifying that the section is in the advantageous section. May be done.

In S178, the display CPU 101 executes the first state display process (S178). In this first state display process, the display CPU 101 performs, for example, a process for notifying the player that the advantageous section is the second advantageous section. The contents of the display of the first state are as described above. The display CPU 101 returns to the process of S171 after executing the process of S178.

In S179, the display CPU 101 executes various counter update processes during the normal section as in S160 of the third example described above (S179). Next, the display CPU 101 executes the normal state display process (S180) in the same manner as in S163 of the third example described above. The display CPU 101 returns to the process of S171 after executing the process of S180. In this example as well, as in the third example described above, when the second advantageous section is in the high RT gaming state (RT2), the third state is displayed and the second advantageous section is used. When it is not the high RT gaming state (RT2), the first state is displayed (different from the display of the first state in this example), and when it is a normal section and the high RT gaming state (RT2), the second state is displayed. May be displayed.

As described above, according to the game display device 1 of this example, when there are a plurality of advantageous sections (first advantageous section and second advantageous section) having different durations, the number of games in the advantageous section is relative. The predetermined state is displayed until a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times) is set as the number of times the game can be played in the first advantageous section, which has a short duration, and when the number of times exceeds the specified number of times The display of the status is started. Therefore, even when the pachi-slot gaming machine 2b has a plurality of advantageous sections having different durations, it is possible to appropriately notify information on which advantageous section is in the pachislot game machine 2b with a simple configuration.

Further, in this case, as the display of the specific state is started, the display of the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section is also started. As a result, not only the information regarding the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section can be displayed more appropriately, but also the display can give the player a sense of expectation and improve the interest of the game.

[Example of timing chart of each control process when the game display device (game device) according to the first to ninth embodiments and the game machine according to the second specification example are connected]
Next, an example of a timing chart of each control process when the game display device (game device) according to the first to ninth embodiments described above and the game machine according to the second specification example described above are connected. Will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63.

<Third example of the timing chart of the control processing between the game display device 1 and the pachislot game machine 2b according to the second specification example>
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a third example of the timing chart of the control process when the above-mentioned game display device 1 and the above-mentioned pachislot game machine 2b according to the second specification example are connected, and is more specific. Is a diagram showing a timing chart corresponding to a part of a third example of the main control process of the game display device 1 described with reference to FIG. 59.

First, at the time of "t-A", in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the above-mentioned advantageous section start condition (for example, advantageous section start condition A) is satisfied, and the game section shifts from the normal section to the first advantageous section. Based on this, the output of the advantageous interval signal is started. When the input of the advantageous section signal is started, the game display device 1 starts displaying the first state indicating that the advantageous section is in progress. Further, the game display device 1 adds "1" to the advantageous section number counter. Further, the game display device 1 starts counting the number of games in the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter and counting the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquisition number counter.

At the time of "t-A", in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the above-mentioned advantageous section start condition (for example, advantageous section start condition B) is satisfied, and the game section shifts from the normal section to the second advantageous section. Based on this, the output of the advantageous interval signal may be started. Similarly, in this case as well, when the input of the advantageous section signal is started, the game display device 1 starts displaying the first state indicating that the advantageous section is in progress. Further, the game display device 1 adds "1" to the advantageous section number counter. Further, the game display device 1 starts counting the number of games in the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter and counting the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquisition number counter.

Next, at the time of "t-B", in the pachislot game machine 2b, the above-mentioned advantageous section end condition (for example, advantageous section end condition A) is satisfied, and the game section shifts from the first advantageous section to the normal section. Based on, the output of the advantageous section signal is terminated. When the input of the advantageous section signal is completed, the game display device 1 ends the display of the first state and starts the display of the normal state. Further, the game display device 1 finishes counting the number of games played in the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter and counting the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquisition number counter, and counts the count results by these counters. It is stored as a game history, and the counting results by these counters are initialized (cleared to 0).

At the time of "t-B", in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the gaming section shifted from the normal section to the second advantageous section, but the gaming state did not shift to the high RT gaming state (RT2), and was described above. The output of the advantageous section signal may be terminated based on the fact that the advantageous section end condition (for example, the advantageous section end condition B) is satisfied and the game section shifts from the second advantageous section to the normal section. Similarly in this case, when the input of the advantageous section signal is completed, the game display device 1 ends the display of the first state and starts the display of the normal state. Further, the game display device 1 finishes counting the number of games played in the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter and counting the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquisition number counter, and counts the count results by these counters. It is stored as a game history, and the counting results by these counters are initialized (cleared to 0).

Next, at the time of "t-C", in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the above-mentioned ascending replay 2 is established, and the RT gaming state shifts from the medium RT gaming state (RT1) to the high RT gaming state (RT2). Based on this, the output of the signal during RT is started. When the input of the RT in-game signal is started, the game display device 1 starts the display of the second state indicating that a specific RT game state is in progress. However, as described above, when the game section is a normal section, no particular control change may be made even if the input of the RT signal is started. In this example, when the game section is a normal section but is in a specific RT game state (for example, between "t-C" and "t-D" shown in FIG. 61), the medal for that period. A counter (counter for the number of acquisitions during RT) may be provided to count the number of acquisitions of Further, the counting result and the fact that the player has moved to a specific RT game state may be confirmed in the detailed game history described above.

Next, at the time of "t-D", in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the above-mentioned descending replay or descending symbol is established, and the RT gaming state shifts from the high RT gaming state (RT2) to the low RT gaming state (RT0). Based on this, the output of the signal during RT is terminated. When the input of the RT signal is completed, the game display device 1 ends the display of the second state and starts the display of the normal state. When the above-mentioned RT acquisition number counter is provided, the counting of the number of medals acquired in a specific RT game state by the counter is completed, the counting result by the counter is stored as a game history, and the counter is used. Initialize (clear 0) the counting result by.

Next, at the time of "t-E", in the pachislot game machine 2b, the above-mentioned advantageous section start condition (for example, advantageous section start condition B) is satisfied, and the game section shifts from the normal section to the second advantageous section. Based on, the output of the advantageous section signal is started. When the input of the advantageous section signal is started, the game display device 1 starts displaying the first state indicating that the advantageous section is in progress. Further, the game display device 1 adds "1" to the advantageous section number counter. Further, the game display device 1 starts counting the number of games in the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter and counting the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquisition number counter.

Next, at the time of "t-F", in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the above-mentioned ascending replay 2 is established, and the RT gaming state shifts from the medium RT gaming state (RT1) to the high RT gaming state (RT2). Based on this, the output of the signal during RT is started. When the input of the RT in-game signal is started, the game display device 1 ends the display of the first state, and is in the advantageous section and in the specific RT game state (in the pseudo-bonus). The display of the third state indicating is started. Further, the game display device 1 adds up the number of medals acquired by the advantageous section acquisition number counter (or the other counter described above) between “tE” and “tF”. , Start displaying the total number of advantageous sections acquired as described above. That is, in this example, the display indicates the number of medals acquired during the pseudo-bonus, but when the displayed number of medals is in the second advantageous section and is not in a specific RT gaming state. The number of medals won is reflected.

Next, at the time of "t-G", in the pachislot game machine 2b, the above-mentioned advantageous section end condition (for example, advantageous section end condition B) is satisfied, and the game section shifts from the second advantageous section to the normal section. Based on, the output of the advantageous section signal is terminated. When the input of the advantageous section signal is completed, the game display device 1 ends the display of the third state and starts the display of the normal state. In this case, the display of the third state may be ended and the display of the second state may be started. Further, the game display device 1 finishes counting the number of games played in the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter and counting the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquisition number counter, and counts the count results by these counters. It is stored as a game history, and the counting results by these counters are initialized (cleared to 0).

Next, at the time of "TH", in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the above-mentioned descending replay or descending symbol is established, and the RT gaming state shifts from the high RT gaming state (RT2) to the low RT gaming state (RT0). Based on this, the output of the signal during RT is terminated. The game display device 1 does not make any particular control change even when the input of the signal during RT is completed.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the game display device 1, at the time of “t—G”, the above-mentioned advantageous section end condition (for example, advantageous section end condition B) is satisfied in the pachislot game machine 2b, and the game is played. Based on the transition of the section from the second advantageous section to the normal section, when the output of the advantageous section signal is terminated, at the time of “TH”, the pachislot gaming machine 2b has the above-mentioned descent replay or descent. Based on the fact that the symbol is established and the RT gaming state shifts from the high RT gaming state (RT2) to the low RT gaming state (RT0), the display of the third state is continued until the output of the signal during RT is completed. You may try to do it. Further, in this case, the number of games played in the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter and the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquisition counter are continuously counted until the time of "TH". May be good.

As described above, also in this example, the start time point and the end time point of counting of the various counters described above (particularly, the advantageous section counter and the advantageous section acquisition number counter) can be arbitrarily set. That is, as long as more appropriate information for the player can be notified, counting starts at any of the above-mentioned "t-E" to "t-H" time points according to the specifications of the connected game machine and the like. It can be adopted as a point in time or a point in time.

<Fourth example of the timing chart of the control processing between the game display device 1 and the pachislot game machine 2b according to the second specification example>
62 and 63 are diagrams showing a fourth example of the timing chart of the control process when the above-mentioned game display device 1 and the above-mentioned pachislot game machine 2b according to the second specification example are connected. More specifically, it is a figure which shows the timing chart corresponding to a part of the 4th example of the main control processing of the game display device 1 described with reference to FIG. 60.

(Example of timing chart in the first advantageous section)
FIG. 62 shows an example of a timing chart when the first advantageous section occurs in the pachi-slot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example.

First, at the time of "t-a1", in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the above-mentioned advantageous section start condition (for example, advantageous section start condition A) is satisfied, and the game section shifts from the normal section to the first advantageous section. Based on this, the output of the advantageous interval signal is started. At this point, the game display device 1 does not change the control of the display content in particular, counts the number of games in the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter, and acquires the number of medals in the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquisition number counter. Start counting.

Next, at the time of "t-b1", the pachislot gaming machine 2b outputs a medal insertion signal for three pulses based on the insertion of three medals and the start operation. The game display device 1 adds "1" to the advantageous section counter. Further, the game display device 1 subtracts "3" from the advantageous section acquisition number counter.

Next, at the time of "t-c1", the pachislot gaming machine 2b outputs a medal payout signal for 9 pulses based on the establishment of the specific small winning combination. The game display device 1 adds "9" to the advantageous section acquisition number counter.

Next, at the time of "t-d1", the pachislot gaming machine 2b outputs a medal insertion signal for three pulses based on the insertion of three medals and the start operation. The game display device 1 adds "1" to the advantageous section counter. Further, the game display device 1 subtracts "3" from the advantageous section acquisition number counter.

Next, at the time of "te1", the pachislot gaming machine 2b outputs a medal payout signal for 10 pulses based on the establishment of the MB small and medium-sized combination. The game display device 1 adds "10" to the advantageous section acquisition number counter. Here, in the pachislot gaming machine 2b, the output of the advantageous section signal ends based on the fact that the advantageous section end condition (for example, the advantageous section end condition A) is satisfied and the game section shifts from the first advantageous section to the normal section. Will be done. The game display device 1 finishes counting the number of games played in the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter and counting the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquisition number counter, and counts the counting results by these counters in the game history. And initialize (clear 0) the counting result by these counters.

Next, at the time of "t-f1", the pachislot gaming machine 2b outputs a medal insertion signal for three pulses based on the insertion of three medals and the start operation. The game display device 1 does not make any particular control change. In this way, when the generated advantageous section is the first advantageous section, it is not positively notified that it is an advantageous section.

(Example of timing chart in the second advantageous section)
FIG. 63 shows an example of a timing chart when a second advantageous section occurs in the pachislot gaming machine 2b according to the second specification example.

First, at the time of "t-a2", in the pachislot game machine 2b, the above-mentioned advantageous section start condition (for example, advantageous section start condition B) is satisfied, and the game section shifts from the normal section to the second advantageous section. Based on this, the output of the advantageous section signal is started. At this point, the game display device 1 does not change the control of the display content in particular, counts the number of games in the advantageous section by the advantageous section counter, and acquires the number of medals in the advantageous section by the advantageous section acquisition number counter. Start counting.

Next, at the time of "t-b2", the pachislot gaming machine 2b outputs a medal insertion signal for three pulses based on the insertion of three medals and the start operation. The game display device 1 adds "1" to the advantageous section counter. Further, the game display device 1 subtracts "3" from the advantageous section acquisition number counter.

Next, at the time of "t-c2", the pachislot gaming machine 2b outputs a medal payout signal for 9 pulses based on the establishment of the specific small winning combination. The game display device 1 adds "9" to the advantageous section acquisition number counter.

Next, at the time of "t-d2", the pachislot gaming machine 2b outputs a medal insertion signal for three pulses based on the insertion of three medals and the start operation. The game display device 1 adds "1" to the advantageous section counter. Further, the game display device 1 subtracts "3" from the advantageous section acquisition number counter.

Next, at the time of "te2", the pachislot gaming machine 2b outputs a medal payout signal for 9 pulses based on the establishment of the specific small winning combination. The game display device 1 adds "9" to the advantageous section acquisition number counter.

Next, at the time of "t-f2", the pachislot gaming machine 2b outputs a medal insertion signal for three pulses based on the insertion of three medals and the start operation. The game display device 1 adds "1" to the advantageous section counter. Further, the game display device 1 subtracts "3" from the advantageous section acquisition number counter. At this time, since the advantageous section counter becomes "3", the game display device 1 starts displaying the first state indicating that the advantageous section is in progress, and is based on the value of the advantageous section acquisition number counter. Then, the display of the total number of acquired advantageous sections described above is started. In this way, when an advantageous section occurs and the generated advantageous section is regarded as the second advantageous section, it is positively notified that the advantageous section is an advantageous section.

Next, at the time of "t-g2", the pachislot gaming machine 2b outputs a medal payout signal for three pulses based on the establishment of the replay combination. The game display device 1 adds "3" to the advantageous section acquisition number counter. At this time, the display of the first state and the display of the total number of acquired advantageous sections described above continue.

Although the embodiments according to the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications.

The game display device is not limited to one that detects the state of the game machine based on various signals output from the external relay terminal plate of the game machine and performs various controls. For example, various detection devices such as the above-mentioned advantageous section detection sensor (not shown) may be used to detect the state of the gaming machine and perform various controls. That is, although the game machine side does not output a signal, the information required for performing various controls on the game display device side can be obtained by appropriately providing a detection device capable of acquiring the information on the game display device side. It should be acquired. In this case, it is preferable that these various detection devices are configured to be removable from the game display device. In this way, it is possible to provide a game display device that is inexpensive in its basic specifications while improving the expandability of the game display device by enabling connection with various game machines.

Further, in a game machine that can be connected to a game display device, when the above-mentioned section display area (section display) is provided and a plurality of advantageous sections are mounted, the above-mentioned section display area (section display area) An advantageous section (for example, the above-mentioned second advantageous section) in which the section indicator) is lit and an advantageous section in which the above-mentioned section display area (section indicator) is not lit (for example, the above-mentioned first advantageous section) are provided. You may do so.

Further, in a game machine that can be connected to a game display device, when a standby section is provided in an advantageous section, the advantageous section signal is output even during the standby section, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is advantageous during the standby section. The output of the advantageous section signal may be started when the transition from the standby section to the advantageous section (for example, when the combination of BB symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line) without outputting the section signal. Further, the output of the advantageous section signal may be started at the same timing as the lighting start timing of the section display area (section indicator) described above.

As the game display device, a different screen unit may be applied to each game machine, or the same type of screen unit may be applied to a so-called island unit.

The display device for games may be configured as a transmissive projector device and may be replaceable with a screen unit having a different screen form. For example, the projector main body may be installed on the upper surface or the side surface of the housing. You may. Further, for example, the light projected from the projector main body may be directly incident on the incident surface on the back side of the screen without using a reflector.

The replaceable type of the screen unit is not limited to the three types of the above-described embodiment, and may be two types or four or more types as long as the screen form is different. Further, the material of the screen may be different regardless of the form of the screen.

The position of the light emitting surface is not limited to the left and right ends of the front surface, and may be, for example, an upper portion, a lower portion, or a side surface of the front surface.

The second display surface is not limited to the shape described above, and may have, for example, a parallelogram, a rhombus, or a circular shape as long as it has a thickness in front of the first display surface.

The operation unit including the button may be provided integrally with the screen unit.

The movable decorative sheet and the fixed decorative sheet are not limited to the side surfaces, and may be provided behind, for example, the light emitting surface on the front side.

The light source used for the movable decorative sheet or the fixed decorative sheet is not limited to the LED, and for example, an EL (Electroluminescence) element or a light bulb may be applied.

The light guide holes in the movable decorative sheet and the fixed decorative sheet may have different sizes, for example, the diameter of the light guide holes in the decorative sheet on the rear side close to the LED is relatively large, while the front surface far from the LED. The diameter of the light guide hole in the decorative sheet on the side may be relatively small. Alternatively, conversely, the diameter of the light guide hole in the decorative sheet on the rear surface side may be relatively small, and the diameter of the light guide hole in the decorative sheet on the front surface side may be relatively large. By making the sizes of both light guide holes different in this way, sufficient clearance is secured when these light guide holes are overlapped or not overlapped, and the amount of movement of the movable decorative sheet is sufficiently large. Can be secured.

When replacing the screen unit, it may be necessary to change the projection data corresponding to the projection image or optically correct the projection image because the shape and characteristics of the screen are different. In order to deal with such a case, the control unit of the game display device stores in advance the projection image data and the setting information related to the optical correction data according to the form of each screen, and responds to each screen. The setting information may be called and applied.

Further, in order to realize a configuration in which the corresponding setting information can be applied when the screen unit is replaced, (1) a process of determining whether or not the LED board (cable) is connected by the control unit is provided, and (2) the screen unit. When the control unit of the chassis is started after the screen unit is replaced, a specific command is sent from the control unit to the control unit to determine which screen unit the control unit is connected to. The setting screen may be displayed by providing a process for determining in (3) by operating the button of the operation unit, and the administrator may be able to input the type of the screen unit after replacement as setting information on this setting screen. ..

Such setting information can be said to be information that determines what kind of projection method (method) is used to project one image data. Further, the setting information may be changed from the server device as a hall computer, or when it is changed in one game display device by the master-slave method, it is also changed in another game display device. You may.

Regarding the movable decorative sheet, when the LED is lit or blinks when the game display device receives the game status signal from the game machine, or when the game display device detects a certain number of acquisitions, etc. It may be moved in the direction of increasing the contrast.

For example, when performing an island interlocking effect or the same model interlocking effect on a plurality of game display devices, the drive mechanism corresponding to the movable decorative sheet of each game display device is operated in accordance with the interlocking effect. The movable decorative sheet in the plurality of game display devices may be changed at the same time.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

In a conventional game machine, light is projected upward from a projection means provided below the housing, and light is reflected forward by a reflecting surface provided inside the housing. Some are provided with a so-called transmissive projector device that projects an image on a front screen (projected portion) as a display device (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-99743).

Further, as this type of display device, there is a game display device that displays various information related to the game corresponding to the game machine, and it has been proposed that such a game display device be configured by a projector device. ..

However, in recent years, a projector device is applied to a game display device because a display form of the game display device according to the layout and visual effects of the game hall and the design of the corresponding game machine is desired. It was not possible to freely change such a display form by itself, and there was room for improvement in the design and variety of the display form.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points. For example, a game in which a display form can be freely changed according to a game hall or a game machine, and the design and variety of the display form can be enhanced. It is an object of the present invention to provide a display device for use.

(Appendix A1)
The game display device (for example, the game display device 1) according to one aspect of the present invention includes a projection means (for example, a projector main body 12) for projecting light for displaying information related to the game as a projection image, and the projection. A light passing surface through which the light projected from the means passes (for example, an opening surface 10A) and a projected portion (for example, screens 110A to 110C) on which a projected image is projected by transmitting the light passing through the light passing surface. ), And the projected portion has a display surface (for example, (first) display surface 1101, second display surface 1101B, 1101C) on which the projected image is projected, with respect to the light passing surface. The display surface is interchangeably arranged, and the display surface is configured so that the visual impression of the projected image can be changed according to the replacement of the projected portion.

According to such a configuration, the visual impression of the projected image on the display surface can be changed by replacing the projected portion. Therefore, for example, the projected portion is replaced according to the layout of the game hall or the design of the game machine. The display form can be freely changed only by itself, and the design and variety of the display form can be enhanced.

(Appendix A2)
A preferred embodiment of the present invention has at least another display surface (for example, a light emitting surface 111a) different from the display surface, and the other display surface can be displayed by a method different from the display of the projected image. It is characterized by being.

According to such a configuration, the information about the game can be displayed separately on the display surface for displaying the projected image and the other display surface. Further, for example, on the other display surface, the display of the projected image is Since the display can be performed by another method, the design and variety of the display form can be further enhanced.

In a conventional game machine, light is projected upward from a projection means provided below the housing, and light is reflected forward by a reflecting surface provided inside the housing. Some are provided with a so-called transmissive projector device that projects an image on a front screen (projected portion) as a display device (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-99743).

Further, as this type of display device, there is a game display device that displays various information related to the game corresponding to the game machine, and it has been proposed that such a game display device be configured by a projector device. .. Some such projector devices enhance the visual effect by deforming the screen in an uneven shape (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147828).

However, in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147828, since the entire front and back surfaces of the screen are uneven, the projection distance from the projection means to the screen becomes significantly uneven according to the unevenness, and such unevenness. When this screen is applied to a transmissive projector device, there is a problem that the adjustment and arrangement of optical systems such as a projection lens and a reflecting surface become complicated.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and provides a game display device capable of easily enhancing a visual effect while having a simple configuration without complicating the optical system for projection. The purpose is.

(Appendix B1)
The game display device (for example, the game display device 1) according to one aspect of the present invention includes a projection means (for example, a projector main body 12) for projecting light for displaying information related to the game as a projection image, and the projection. A projected portion (for example, screens 110A to 110C) on which a projected image is projected by the light projected from the means is provided, and the projected portion is an incident surface (for example, an incident surface on which the light projected from the projection means is incident). , The incident surface 1100) and a display surface (for example, (first) display surface 1101, second display surface 1101B, 1101C) on which a projected image is projected by transmitting light incident on the incident surface. However, the incident surface is composed of a uniform surface, and the display surface is divided into a first region (for example, the first display surface 1101) and a second region having a thickness different from that of the first region. It is characterized by having at least a region (for example, second display surfaces 1101B, 1101C).

According to such a configuration, the incident surface of the projected portion is composed of a uniform surface, and the distance from the projection means to the incident surface is constant. Therefore, an optical system for projection from the projection means to the incident surface can be used. While it can be configured simply, it is possible to easily enhance the visual effect by changing the visual impression of the projected image simply by making the thickness of the first region and the second region of the display surface different. it can.

(Appendix B2)
A preferred embodiment of the present invention includes a light passing surface (for example, an opening surface 10A) through which light projected from the projection means passes, and the projected portion is arranged so as to be replaceable with respect to the light passing surface. It is characterized by being done.

According to such a configuration, the visual impression of the projected image on the display surface can be changed only by replacing the projected portion arranged on the light passing surface, so that the display form can be freely changed. , The design and variety of display forms can be enhanced.

The conventional game machine is provided with a sheet member (decorative sheet), and the back surface of the sheet member is irradiated with light so that the pattern (image) drawn on the sheet member can be visually recognized from the front surface side. Some have enhanced effects (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-165868).

Further, there is a game display device that displays various information related to the game corresponding to the game machine, and it has been proposed to apply a seat member to such a game display device.

However, in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-165868, it is difficult to adjust the brightness of light due to the characteristics of the relatively thin sheet member, so that it is difficult to change the contrast of the image displayed on the sheet member. There was a drawback.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and is a game display device capable of easily changing the contrast of an image displayed on a sheet member and, by extension, easily enhancing a visual effect. The purpose is to provide a game machine.

(Appendix C1)
The game display device (for example, the game display device 1) according to one aspect of the present invention is for guiding the light emitting means (for example, LED20A) that emits light and the light from the light emitting means from the back surface side to the front surface side. A plurality of sheet members (for example, movable decorative sheet 30, fixed decorative sheet 40) having a plurality of light guide portions (for example, light guide holes 30A and 40A) and arranged so as to face each other, and the plurality of seat members. Between the first position and the second position, at least one of the sheet members (for example, the movable decorative sheet 30) is made relatively displaceable with respect to the other sheet member (for example, the fixed decorative sheet 40). When a driving means (for example, a driving mechanism 32) to be moved is provided and the one seat member is in the first position, the plurality of light guide portions of the one seat member may be of the other seat member. When the one sheet member moves from the first position to the second position due to partial or total overlap with the plurality of light guide portions, the plurality of light guide portions of the one sheet member may be moved. The other sheet member is characterized in that it is displaced with respect to the plurality of light guide portions.

According to such a configuration, for example, as one seat member moves from the first position to the second position, the overlapping portion of the light guide portions in both seat members gradually becomes smaller, and these guides are introduced. The light guided from the light emitting means on the back surface side to the front surface side through the light portion gradually decreases. That is, since one sheet member can be appropriately displaced with respect to the other sheet member and the illuminance can be changed according to the degree of overlap between the light guide portions of both, the display is performed by a plurality of sheet members facing each other. The contrast of the resulting image can be easily changed by adjusting the illuminance, and thus the visual effect can be easily enhanced.

(Appendix C2)
A preferred embodiment of the present invention is a projection means (for example, a projector main body 12) for projecting light for displaying information about a game as a projected image, and a main body portion (for example, a housing 10) for accommodating the projection means. And the projected portion (for example, screens 110A to 110C) on which the projected image is projected by the light projected from the projection means, and the cover portion (for example, the screen) that exteriorizes the main body portion while holding the projected portion. Units 11A to 11C), the one seat member is provided on the main body, the other seat member is provided on the cover, and the cover is replaced with respect to the main body. It is characterized by being possible.

According to such a configuration, the visual impression of the projected image on the projected portion can be changed by replacing the cover portion integrally with the projected portion. Therefore, for example, depending on the layout of the amusement park or the design of the game machine. The display form of the projected image can be freely changed simply by replacing the cover portion, and the design and variety of the display form can be enhanced.

(Appendix C3)
The gaming machine according to another aspect of the present invention (for example, pachinko gaming machine 2a, pachislot gaming machine 2b) has a light emitting means (for example, LED20A) that emits light and light from the light emitting means from the back surface side to the front surface side. A plurality of sheet members (for example, movable decorative sheet 30, fixed decorative sheet 40) having a plurality of light guide portions (for example, light guide holes 30A and 40A) and arranged so as to face each other. The first position and the second position are set so that at least one of the plurality of sheet members (for example, the movable decorative sheet 30) can be displaced relative to the other sheet member (for example, the fixed decorative sheet 40). When a driving means (for example, a driving mechanism 32) for moving between the seat members is provided and the one seat member is in the first position, the plurality of light guide portions of the one seat member are the other. When the one sheet member partially or wholly overlaps with the plurality of light guide portions of the sheet member and the one sheet member moves from the first position to the second position, the plurality of light guides of the one sheet member. The portion is characterized in that the other seat member is displaced with respect to the plurality of light guide portions.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize a game machine that has the same function and effect as the game display device according to one aspect of the present invention.

As a game system including a game display device and a game machine, for example, those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-96100 are known. However, since this game system does not have a configuration or a function as a game display device or a game machine as in the present invention, it has not been possible to improve the interest. The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game display device and a game machine capable of improving the interest.

(Appendix D1)
The game display device according to one aspect of the present invention includes a projection means for projecting light for displaying information about the game as a projected image, a light passing surface through which the light projected from the projection means passes, and the light. It includes a projected portion on which a projected image is projected by transmitting light that has passed through a passing surface, and the projected portion has a display surface on which a projected image is projected, with respect to the light passing surface. The display surface is interchangeably arranged, and the display surface is configured so that the visual impression of the projected image can be changed according to the replacement of the projected portion.

According to such a configuration, the visual impression of the projected image on the display surface can be changed by replacing the projected portion. Therefore, for example, the projected portion is replaced according to the layout of the game hall or the design of the game machine. The display form can be freely changed only by itself, and the design and variety of the display form can be enhanced.

(Appendix D2)
A preferred embodiment of the present invention is characterized in that it has at least another display surface different from the display surface, and the other display surface can be displayed by a method different from the display of the projected image. ..

According to such a configuration, the information about the game can be displayed separately on the display surface for displaying the projected image and the other display surface. Further, for example, on the other display surface, the display of the projected image is Since the display can be performed by another method, the design and variety of the display form can be further enhanced.

The present invention also relates to a game display device corresponding to a game machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine.

In a conventional game machine, light is projected upward from a projection means provided below the housing, and light is reflected forward by a reflecting surface provided inside the housing. Some are provided with a so-called transmissive projector device that projects an image on a front screen (projected portion) as a display device (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-99743).

Further, as this type of display device, there is a game display device that displays various information related to the game corresponding to the game machine, and it has been proposed that such a game display device be configured by a projector device. ..

However, in recent years, a projector device is applied to a game display device because a display form of the game display device according to the layout and visual effects of the game hall and the design of the corresponding game machine is desired. It was not possible to freely change such a display form by itself, and there was room for improvement in the design and variety of the display form.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game display device capable of enhancing the design, variety and visual effect of the display form.

(Appendix E1)
In order to achieve the above object, the game display device according to the present invention is a projection means provided in the housing (10) of the game display device and projecting light for displaying information about the game as a projection image. In a game display device having a (projector body 12) and a projected portion (screens 110A to 110F) on which the projected image is projected, at least one edge portion (for example, the projected portion) of the projected portion. On the base (70) provided in the vicinity of the lower edge portion and on which at least one light emitting element is mounted, and on the edge portion of the projected portion facing the edge portion (for example, the upper edge portion of the projected portion). It is characterized by including a diffused reflection portion (72) provided and a light-shielding member (73) provided in a gap portion formed between the base and the housing.

According to the present invention, in addition to the projected image by the projection means, the visual effect and the decorative effect of the display form can be enhanced by providing the light emitting means for edging at least one edge of the projection screen.

Further, by preventing the generation of leaked light from the light emitting element to the inside of the housing, the irradiation efficiency is improved and the brightness and resolution of the projected image projected on the projected portion are not affected.

(Appendix E2)
Further, in the game display device according to the present invention, the projected portion is composed of a light guide unit (incident surface 1100) and a display unit (display surface 1101) having a predetermined thickness, respectively, and the light guide unit is from the light emitting element. It is characterized in that the light of the above is guided to the diffused reflection portion. According to the present invention, the light from the light emitting element can be efficiently guided to the diffused reflection portion.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game display device capable of enhancing the design, variety and visual effect of the display form.

The present invention also relates to a gaming device corresponding to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine.

Various gaming devices are connected to the conventional gaming machine, and control is performed based on the information transmitted from the gaming machine. For example, a game display device (so-called data display) that displays statistical information such as game results can be connected to the game machine. The game display device can display game information such as the number of hits of a bonus game or the like, the number of games since the end of the previous hit game state, and the number of medals acquired during the hit game state (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-99743). See Gazette).

Generally, a call button is provided on the game display device, and when a trouble occurs in the game machine, the call button is pressed by the player to display a lamp provided on the game display device. The corner lamps installed at the corners of the island are lit, making it possible to draw the attention of the staff.

By the way, a general call button is a movable type that moves in the pressing direction when pressed by a player, and lighting control of a lamp is performed based on a signal from a sensor that detects the movement. Since such a movable call button has a gap in the moving part structurally, it is easy for moisture, dust, etc. to enter, and when a trouble occurs in the game machine, a player who wants to continue the game quickly calls. There is a possibility that the operating part may be tired by repeatedly hitting the button, and there is a problem that a failure due to these factors is likely to occur. In addition, since the player usually pays attention to mainly playing the game, he / she rarely pays attention to the arrangement mode of such a call button, and calls for the first time when some trouble occurs. I often look for where the buttons are located. Therefore, it is preferable that the call button is arranged at a position that is easy for the player to understand.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming device which can reduce the possibility of failure and whose operation location is easy for a player to understand. ..

(Appendix F1)
In order to achieve the above object, in the gaming device (gaming device F1) according to the present invention, the design unit (design unit F1021b) having translucency in the touch area (touch area F1021a) touched by the player A touch sensor (touch sensor) that has translucency with the provided exterior panel (exterior panel F1021) and is provided in association with the touch area on the back side of the exterior panel to detect a touch input to the touch area. F1022), a light source (LED array F1024), a light guide plate (light guide plate F1023) provided on the back side of the touch sensor, and guiding light from the light source toward the design portion of the exterior panel, and the light source. It is characterized by having a control means (control circuit F10250) for performing lighting control.

According to the above configuration, when there is a touch input from the player in the touch area, the touch sensor detects the touch input. On the other hand, the control means is turned on by the lighting control of the light source, the light from the light source is guided to the design unit, and the player can visually recognize the light from the design unit. With such a configuration, the design part in the touch area of the exterior panel is illuminated by the light from the light source, which makes it easier for the player to recognize the place to be touched, and is not movable like the conventional call button. Since the input is performed on the touch region formed in a plane, it is possible to prevent a failure due to dust or the like entering the operating portion and a failure due to fatigue of the moving portion.

(Appendix F2)
Further, in the gaming device according to the present invention,
The control means may control to change the lighting mode of the light source when there is a touch input to the touch region.

According to the above configuration, the player can recognize that his / her touch has been input by changing the lighting mode of the light source that illuminates the design unit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from touching the touch area many times until the clerk is called, and the surface of the touch area is deteriorated.

(Appendix F3)
Further, in the gaming device according to the present invention,
A light guide plate (light guide plate G61) having a translucent property, which is detachably arranged on a base (base G101) and formed so that an opening (opening G61a) having a predetermined shape penetrates in the thickness direction, and the light guide plate said It has a plurality of light source for light guide plates (LEDG60A) arranged at positions facing the end surface on the opening side (opening side end surface G61b) forming the opening, and the plurality of light sources for the light guide plate are on the opening side. The light guide plates are arranged so as to be arranged side by side along the end faces, and a part of the light guided from the plurality of light sources for the light guide plates into the light guide plates via the end faces on the opening side is guided to the light guide plates. A reflecting portion (reflecting portion G61d) that has been subjected to a reflection process that reflects in the thickness direction of the light plate is formed, and the control means is a light source for the plurality of light guide plates when there is a touch input to the touch region. May be controlled to change to a specific lighting mode.

According to the above configuration, the light emitted from the plurality of light sources in response to the player's touch input has a specific lighting mode, spreads radially in the light guide plate and reaches the outer end face, thereby surrounding the light guide plate. It is possible to illuminate the whole in a ring shape, and the light source plate illuminated in a specific lighting mode can be visually recognized from any direction of the game device, and the manager of the game hall can use the touch input for the game. It becomes easier to identify the game machine to which the device is attached. Further, the design can be improved by the light emitted from the surface of the light guide plate, and since the light guide plate is removable from the substrate, it can be replaced with a light guide plate having a different design of reflection processing. It becomes possible to apply the gaming device to various types of gaming machines.

(Appendix F4)
Further, in the gaming device according to the present invention,
The control means may perform control to change the lighting mode of the plurality of light source for the light guide plate according to the elapsed time from the timing of the touch input to the touch region.

According to the above configuration, the manager of the game hall can determine at a glance the time from the timing when the player touch-inputs the time, even if the position is far from the game machine, by visually recognizing the lighting mode of the light guide plate. Even if there are a plurality of gaming devices to which touch input has been performed, it is possible to prioritize the correspondence, so that it is possible to provide an appropriate service to the player.

According to the present invention, it is possible to reduce the possibility of failure, and it is possible to provide a gaming device whose operation location is easy for the player to understand.

The present invention also relates to a gaming device corresponding to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine.

In the game hall where the game machine is installed, various game devices are connected to the game machine. In such a game device, various controls are performed based on the information transmitted from the game machine. As one of such game devices, a game information display device (both a data display device and a display device for each machine) that can display statistical information such as game results and information indicating the game state of the game machine. There is). The player can select a game machine to play a game by using various information displayed on such a game information display device as clues.

In recent years, both are advantageous game states that are advantageous to the player, but in a game information display device connected to a game machine that can operate a specific game state and a special game state that have different start conditions, the effect display in the specific game state and the effect display in the specific game state It has been proposed that it is possible to display an effect having different contents from the effect display in the special gaming state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-96100).

By the way, when there are a plurality of gaming states as advantageous gaming states as in the above-mentioned gaming machine, even if these gaming states are actually transferred to each other, the gaming machine has a series of gaming states. It may be managed as an advantageous gaming state (advantageous section). Further, in such a game machine, from the viewpoint of soundness of gambling, when such an advantageous section continues for a certain period of time, control may be performed to forcibly terminate the advantageous section.

Here, for example, when the game machine side manages and controls such an advantageous section, it is necessary for the game device side to perform the control accordingly. In particular, when trying to notify the player of various types of information, it is required to notify the player's desired information as appropriately as possible.

The present invention has been made in view of these points, and even when a plurality of advantageous gaming states are managed as a series of advantageous sections in a gaming machine, information desired by the player can be obtained. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming device capable of appropriately notifying as much as possible.

(Appendix G1)
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming device according to the present invention
When a predetermined start condition (for example, an advantageous section start condition) is satisfied, an advantageous section advantageous to the player is started, and when a predetermined end condition (for example, an advantageous section end condition) is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated and the gaming state is established. Has a normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) and a special gaming state (for example, a BB gaming state), and in the advantageous section, the gaming state is either the normal gaming state or the special gaming state. Regardless of the above, it is a game device (for example, a game display device 1) that can be connected to a game machine (for example, a pachislot game machine 2b) that continues the advantageous section until the predetermined end condition is satisfied. hand,
Information display means for displaying various information (for example, screen units 11A to 11F) and
A display control means (for example, a control unit 100) that controls the information display means, and
Advantageous section determining means (for example, display CPU 101) for determining whether or not the gaming machine is in the advantageous section according to the operation of the gaming machine, and
A special gaming state determining means (for example, display CPU 101) for determining whether or not the gaming machine is in the special gaming state according to the operation of the gaming machine is provided.
The display control means
When the advantageous section determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section and the special gaming state determining means determines that the gaming machine is not in the special gaming state, the information display means first. Let me display the status,
When the advantageous section determining means determines that the gaming machine is not in the advantageous section and the special gaming state determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state, the information display means second. Let me display the status,
When the advantageous section determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section and the special gaming state determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state, the information display means is the first. It is characterized in that three states are displayed.

In the gaming device according to the present invention, the first state is displayed when it is in the advantageous section and not in the special gaming state, and the second state is displayed when it is in the special gaming state instead of in the advantageous section. When it is performed and the special gaming state is in the advantageous section, the display of the third state is performed. Therefore, even when a plurality of advantageous gaming states are managed as a series of advantageous sections in the gaming machine, the information desired by the player can be notified as appropriately as possible.

(Appendix G2)
Further, the gaming device according to the present invention is
When the gaming machine starts the advantageous section, it outputs a first signal (for example, an advantageous section signal) to the gaming device until the advantageous section ends, and when the special gaming state is started, A second signal (for example, a bonus signal) is output to the gaming device until the special gaming state is terminated.
When the first signal is input from the gaming machine, the advantageous section determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section, and determines that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section.
The special gaming state determining means is characterized in that, when the second signal is input from the gaming machine, it is determined that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state.

Further, in the gaming device according to the present invention, the first state, the second state, or the third state is displayed according to various signals input from the gaming machine, so that the game is played more appropriately. The status of the machine can be notified.

Further, for example, when the game machine side manages and controls such an advantageous section, it is necessary for the game device side to perform the control accordingly. In particular, when trying to notify the player of various types of information, it is required to appropriately notify the situation of the game in the advantageous section.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and even when a plurality of advantageous gaming states are managed as a series of advantageous sections in a gaming machine, the situation of the game in the advantageous section is appropriate. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming device capable of notifying the player.

(Appendix H1)
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming device according to the present invention
When a predetermined start condition (for example, an advantageous section start condition) is satisfied, an advantageous section advantageous to the player is started, and when a predetermined end condition (for example, an advantageous section end condition) is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated and the gaming state is established. Has a normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) and a special gaming state (for example, a BB gaming state), and in the advantageous section, the gaming state is either the normal gaming state or the special gaming state. Regardless of the above, it is a game device (for example, a game display device 1) that can be connected to a game machine (for example, a pachislot game machine 2b) that continues the advantageous section until the predetermined end condition is satisfied. hand,
Information display means for displaying various information (for example, screen units 11A to 11F) and
A display control means (for example, a control unit 100) that controls the information display means, and
Advantageous section determining means (for example, display CPU 101) for determining whether or not the gaming machine is in the advantageous section according to the operation of the gaming machine, and
A special game state determination means (for example, display CPU 101) that determines whether or not the game machine is in the special game state according to the operation of the game machine.
Whether or not the special gaming state determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state when the advantageous section determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section. Instead, a means for counting the number of games in the advantageous section (for example, an advantageous section counter) that counts the number of games in the advantageous section according to the operation of the game machine.
Whether or not the special gaming state determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state when the advantageous section determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section. Instead, it is provided with a means for counting the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section (for example, a counter for the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section), which counts the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section according to the operation of the game machine.
The display control means is characterized in that the information display means can display the counting result by the game number counting means in the advantageous section and the counting result by the game medium number counting means acquired in the advantageous section. ..

In the gaming device according to the present invention, when the player is in the advantageous section, the number of games played in the advantageous section is counted regardless of whether or not the player is in the special game state, and the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section is counted. Are also counted, and the display is performed according to the counting results. Therefore, even when a plurality of advantageous gaming states are managed as a series of advantageous sections in the gaming machine, the status of the game in the advantageous section can be appropriately notified.

(Appendix H2)
Further, the gaming device according to the present invention is
When the gaming machine starts the advantageous section, it outputs a first signal (for example, an advantageous section signal) to the gaming device until the advantageous section ends, and when the special gaming state is started, Until the special gaming state is terminated, a second signal (for example, a bonus medium signal) is output to the gaming device, and when a unit game is started, a third signal (for example, a medal insertion signal) is output. When the unit game is completed and the game medium is paid out, a fourth signal (for example, a medal payout signal) corresponding to the number of payouts of the game medium is output to the game device. ,
When the first signal is input from the gaming machine, the advantageous section determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section, and determines that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section.
When the second signal is input from the gaming machine, the special gaming state determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state, and determines that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state.
The game number counting means in the advantageous section counts the number of games in the advantageous section when the third signal is input from the game machine.
The means for counting the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section is characterized in that when the fourth signal is input from the game machine, the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section is counted.

Further, in the gaming device according to the present invention, various determinations and various counts are performed according to various signals input from the gaming machine, so that the state of the gaming machine is notified more appropriately. be able to.

(Appendix H3)
Further, the gaming device according to the present invention is
The display control means
When the advantageous section determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section and the special gaming state determining means determines that the gaming machine is not in the special gaming state, the information display means first. Let me display the status,
When the advantageous section determining means determines that the gaming machine is not in the advantageous section and the special gaming state determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state, the information display means second. Let me display the status,
When the advantageous section determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section and the special gaming state determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state, the information display means is the first. It is characterized in that three states are displayed.

Further, in the gaming device according to the present invention, the first state is displayed when it is in the advantageous section and not in the special gaming state, and when it is in the special gaming state instead of in the advantageous section, the second state is displayed. The display is performed, and when the advantageous section is in the special gaming state, the display of the third state is performed. Therefore, even when a plurality of advantageous gaming states are managed as a series of advantageous sections in the gaming machine, the information desired by the player can be notified as appropriately as possible.

Further, for example, when the game machine side manages and controls such an advantageous section, it is necessary for the game device side to perform the control accordingly. In particular, when trying to notify the player of information regarding the end of the advantageous section, it is required to appropriately notify the information.

The present invention has been made in view of these points, and even when a plurality of advantageous gaming states are managed as a series of advantageous sections in a gaming machine, information regarding the end of the advantageous section is particularly important. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming device capable of appropriately notifying.

(Appendix I1)
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming device according to the present invention
When a predetermined start condition (for example, an advantageous section start condition) is satisfied, an advantageous section advantageous to the player is started, and when a predetermined end condition (for example, an advantageous section end condition) is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated and the gaming state is established. Has a normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) and a special gaming state (for example, a BB gaming state), and in the advantageous section, the gaming state is either the normal gaming state or the special gaming state. Regardless of the above, it is a game device (for example, a game display device 1) that can be connected to a game machine (for example, a pachislot game machine 2b) that continues the advantageous section until the predetermined end condition is satisfied. hand,
Information display means for displaying various information (for example, screen units 11A to 11F) and
A display control means (for example, a control unit 100) that controls the information display means, and
Advantageous section determining means (for example, display CPU 101) for determining whether or not the gaming machine is in the advantageous section according to the operation of the gaming machine, and
A special game state determination means (for example, display CPU 101) that determines whether or not the game machine is in the special game state according to the operation of the game machine.
Whether or not the special gaming state determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state when the advantageous section determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section. Instead, it is provided with an advantageous section in-game number counting means (for example, an advantageous section counter) that counts the number of games in the advantageous section according to the operation of the gaming machine.
When the specific display start condition associated with the predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, when the advantageous section counter becomes "1495" or more), the display control means performs the remaining games of the advantageous section. It is characterized in that the information display means displays information indicating the number of times or information indicating that the advantageous section ends.

In the gaming device according to the present invention, when a specific display start condition associated with the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, information indicating the remaining number of games of the advantageous section or indicating that the advantageous section ends. Information is being notified. Therefore, even when a plurality of advantageous gaming states are managed as a series of advantageous sections in the gaming machine, it is possible to appropriately notify the information regarding the end of the advantageous section.

(Appendix I2)
Further, the gaming device according to the present invention is
When the gaming machine starts the advantageous section, it outputs a first signal (for example, an advantageous section signal) to the gaming device until the advantageous section ends, and when the special gaming state is started, A second signal (for example, a bonus in-game signal) is output to the gaming device until the special gaming state is terminated, and when a unit game is started, a third signal (for example, a medal insertion signal) is output. It is output to the game device and
When the first signal is input from the gaming machine, the advantageous section determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section, and determines that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section.
When the second signal is input from the gaming machine, the special gaming state determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state, and determines that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state.
The game number counting means in the advantageous section is characterized in that when the third signal is input from the game machine, the number of games played in the advantageous section is counted.

Further, in the gaming device according to the present invention, various determinations and various counts are performed according to various signals input from the gaming machine, so that the state of the gaming machine is notified more appropriately. be able to.

(Appendix I3)
Further, the gaming device according to the present invention is
The display control means
When the advantageous section determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section and the special gaming state determining means determines that the gaming machine is not in the special gaming state, the information display means first. Let me display the status,
When the advantageous section determining means determines that the gaming machine is not in the advantageous section and the special gaming state determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state, the information display means second. Let me display the status,
When the advantageous section determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section and the special gaming state determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state, the information display means is the first. It is characterized in that three states are displayed.

Further, in the gaming device according to the present invention, the first state is displayed when it is in the advantageous section and not in the special gaming state, and when it is in the special gaming state instead of in the advantageous section, the second state is displayed. The display is performed, and when the advantageous section is in the special gaming state, the display of the third state is performed. Therefore, even when a plurality of advantageous gaming states are managed as a series of advantageous sections in the gaming machine, the information desired by the player can be notified as appropriately as possible.

Further, for example, when the game machine side manages and controls such an advantageous section, it is necessary for the game device side to perform the control accordingly. In particular, when trying to notify the player of various types of information, it is necessary to appropriately grasp the number of games played in the advantageous section of the game machine, and also appropriately grasp the number of games played in the normal game state of the game machine. There is a need to. Then, it is required to appropriately notify the information regarding the number of these games.

The present invention has been made in view of these points, and it is possible to appropriately grasp the number of games played in an advantageous section of a gaming machine, and also appropriately grasp the number of games played in a normal gaming state of a gaming machine. , An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming device capable of appropriately notifying information on the number of such games.

(Appendix J1)
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming device according to the present invention
When a predetermined start condition (for example, an advantageous section start condition) is satisfied, an advantageous section advantageous to the player is started, and when a predetermined end condition (for example, an advantageous section end condition) is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated and the game state is achieved. Has a normal game state (for example, a normal game state) and a special game state (for example, a BB game state), and at least a first number (for example, three) of game media is input in the normal game state. In this case, the game can be started, and in the special game state, the game can be started when a second number (for example, two) of game media is inserted, and in the advantageous section, the game state can be started. Can be connected to a game machine (for example, a pachislot game machine 2b) that continues the advantageous section until the predetermined end condition is satisfied, regardless of whether the game state is the normal game state or the special game state. A game device (for example, a game display device 1).
Information display means for displaying various information (for example, screen units 11A to 11F) and
A display control means (for example, a control unit 100) that controls the information display means, and
Advantageous section determining means (for example, display CPU 101) for determining whether or not the gaming machine is in the advantageous section according to the operation of the gaming machine, and
A special game state determination means (for example, display CPU 101) that determines whether or not the game machine is in the special game state according to the operation of the game machine.
Whether or not the special gaming state determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state when the advantageous section determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section. Instead, a means for counting the number of games in the advantageous section (for example, an advantageous section counter) that counts the number of games in the advantageous section according to the operation of the game machine.
When the special gaming state determining means determines that the gaming machine is not in the special gaming state but in the normal gaming state, the advantageous section determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section. A means for counting the number of games in the normal game state (for example, a game number counter) that counts the number of games in the normal game state according to the operation of the game machine is provided regardless of whether or not the game is in the normal game state.
When a unit game is started, the game machine outputs a predetermined signal (for example, a medal insertion signal) to the game device.
The predetermined signal is a signal capable of identifying which of the first number and the second number of game media has been input.
When the predetermined signal is input from the game machine, the game number counting means in the advantageous section does not care whether the number of game media of the first number or the second number is input. Count the number of games played in the advantageous section and
The game number counting means in the normal game state is the number of games in the normal game state when the predetermined signal is input from the game machine and when the first number of game media is input. Count and
The display control means is characterized in that the information display means can display the counting result by the game number counting means in the advantageous section and the counting result by the game number counting means in the normal gaming state.

In the gaming device according to the present invention, the number of games played in the advantageous section is counted regardless of whether or not it is in the special gaming state when it is in the advantageous section, and when it is in the normal gaming state, it is in the advantageous section. Regardless of whether or not, the number of games played during the normal game state is counted. Then, when the player is in the advantageous section, the number of games played in the advantageous section is counted regardless of the number of game media inserted in the unit game, and when the game is in the normal game state, the game medium is input in the unit game. When the number of sheets is a predetermined number (for example, 3 sheets), the number of games played in the normal game state is counted. Therefore, the number of games played in the advantageous section of the game machine can be appropriately grasped, the number of games played in the normal gaming state of the game machine can be appropriately grasped, and the information on the number of games can be appropriately notified. ..

(Appendix J2)
Further, the gaming device according to the present invention is
When the gaming machine starts the advantageous section, it outputs a first signal (for example, an advantageous section signal) to the gaming device until the advantageous section ends, and when the special gaming state is started, A second signal (for example, a bonus signal) is output to the gaming device until the special gaming state is terminated.
When the first signal is input from the gaming machine, the advantageous section determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section, and determines that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section.
The special gaming state determining means is characterized in that, when the second signal is input from the gaming machine, it is determined that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state.

Further, in the gaming device according to the present invention, various determinations are made according to various signals input from the gaming machine, so that the state of the gaming machine can be notified more appropriately.

Further, for example, when the game machine side manages and controls such an advantageous section, it is necessary for the game device side to perform the control accordingly. In particular, when trying to notify the player of information regarding the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section, it is required to appropriately notify the information.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and is a case where a plurality of advantageous gaming states are managed as a series of advantageous sections in a gaming machine, and a waiting period is provided in the advantageous sections. However, in particular, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming device capable of appropriately notifying information on the number of acquired gaming media in an advantageous section.

(Appendix K1)
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming device according to the present invention
When a predetermined start condition (for example, an advantageous section start condition) is satisfied, an advantageous section advantageous to the player is started, and when a predetermined end condition (for example, an advantageous section end condition) is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated and the gaming state is established. Has a normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) and a special gaming state (for example, a BB gaming state), and in the advantageous section, the gaming state is either the normal gaming state or the special gaming state. Regardless of the above, it is a game device (for example, a game display device 1) that can be connected to a game machine (for example, a pachislot game machine 2b) that continues the advantageous section until the predetermined end condition is satisfied. hand,
Information display means for displaying various information (for example, screen units 11A to 11F) and
A display control means (for example, a control unit 100) that controls the information display means, and
Advantageous section determining means (for example, display CPU 101) for determining whether or not the gaming machine is in the advantageous section according to the operation of the gaming machine, and
A special game state determination means (for example, display CPU 101) that determines whether or not the game machine is in the special game state according to the operation of the game machine.
Whether or not the special gaming state determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state when the advantageous section determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section. Instead, it is provided with a means for counting the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section (for example, a counter for the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section), which counts the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section according to the operation of the game machine.
When the gaming machine decides to shift from the normal gaming state to the special gaming state, the predetermined start condition can be satisfied, and the normal gaming state is shifted to the special gaming state. The period from the determination of the determination to the transition to the special gaming state is set as the standby section of the advantageous section, and when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the first signal (for example, until the predetermined end condition is satisfied) is satisfied. , Advantageous section signal) is output to the gaming device, and when the special gaming state is started, a second signal (for example, a bonus medium signal) is output to the gaming device until the special gaming state is terminated. However, when the unit game is completed and the game medium is paid out, a third signal (for example, a medal payout signal) corresponding to the number of payouts of the game medium is output to the game device.
When the first signal is input from the gaming machine, the advantageous section determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section, and determines that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section.
When the second signal is input from the gaming machine, the special gaming state determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state, and determines that the gaming machine is in the special gaming state.
The means for counting the number of game media acquired in the advantageous section is such that the special game state determination means causes the game machine to perform within a predetermined period after the game machine is determined to be in the advantageous section by the advantageous section determination means. When it is determined that the player is in the special gaming state, it is assumed that the predetermined period is the waiting section, and the number of acquired game media in the predetermined period is counted as the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section. Without
The display control means is characterized in that the information display means can display the counting result by the acquisition game medium number counting means during the advantageous section.

In the gaming device according to the present invention, when the advantageous section in the game machine starts after passing through a predetermined standby section, the number of acquired game media in the predetermined standby section is the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section. It is not counted as. Therefore, even when the waiting period is provided in the advantageous section in the game machine, the information regarding the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section can be appropriately notified.

(Appendix K2)
Further, the gaming device according to the present invention is
The means for counting the number of game media acquired during the advantageous section is
A means for counting the number of acquired game media during the waiting section (for example, a provisional counting counter) for counting the number of acquired game media in the predetermined period is further provided.
If the counting result by the number of game media acquired in the waiting section is a positive value, the counting result is counted as the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section.
The display control means, when the advantageous section is started,
If the counting result by the game medium number counting means acquired in the waiting section is a positive value, the information display means is displayed with the counting result by the game medium number counting means acquired in the advantageous section including the counting result.
If the counting result by the acquisition game medium number counting means in the waiting section is a negative value, a predetermined initial value (for example, "0") is displayed as the counting result by the acquired game medium number counting means in the advantageous section. It is characterized in that it is displayed by means.

Further, in the gaming device according to the present invention, if the number of acquired game media is increased in the predetermined standby section, it is retroactively counted as the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section, and the advantageous section including it is counted retroactively. It is displayed as the number of acquired game media in the above, and if the number of acquired game media is decreasing, a predetermined initial value is displayed as the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section when the advantageous section is actually started. You may. As a result, not only the information regarding the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section can be displayed more appropriately, but also the display can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In recent years, it is output from a game machine in a game information display device connected to a game machine capable of operating a state (ART) advantageous to the player, in which a procedure of a stop operation advantageous to the player (stop operation order) is notified. When a predetermined signal (ART signal) indicating the advantageous state is on, an effect display indicating the advantageous state is displayed, and when the predetermined signal is off, the effect is displayed. It has been proposed that the effect display can be terminated (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-96100).

By the way, like the above-mentioned game machine, it is good if the start and end of the state advantageous to the player can be recognized on the game device side, but when they are not recognizable on the game device side, Ingenuity is required to display the effect linked to the start and end of the advantageous state. In particular, regarding the end of the advantageous state, there are many game machines whose specifications are not recognizable on the game device side, and even when connected to a game machine having such specifications, there is a discrepancy in the displayed contents. It is considered necessary to prevent the occurrence of the above as much as possible.

The present invention has been made in view of these points, and even if the gaming device cannot clearly recognize the end of a state advantageous to the player in the gaming machine, the display content is thereby displayed. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming device capable of preventing inconsistency from occurring as much as possible.

(Appendix L1)
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming device according to the present invention
When a predetermined start condition (for example, an advantageous section start condition) is satisfied, an advantageous section advantageous to the player is started, and when a predetermined end condition (for example, an advantageous section end condition) is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated and the advantageous section is terminated. In the section, when at least a specific combination (for example, push order small combination 1 to 6) is won, a gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine) that notifies the procedure of the stop operation in which a specific number (for example, 9) of game media is paid out. , A game device (for example, a game display device 1) that can be connected to a pachislot game machine 2b).
Information display means for displaying various information (for example, screen units 11A to 11F) and
A display control means (for example, a control unit 100) that controls the information display means, and
An advantageous section start determination means (for example, display CPU 101) that determines whether or not the advantageous section has been started in the game machine according to the operation of the game machine.
A specific game medium number payout determination means (for example, display CPU 101) that determines whether or not the specific number of game media has been paid out during the advantageous section in the game machine according to the operation of the game machine.
An advantageous section end determination means (for example, display CPU 101) for determining whether or not the advantageous section has been completed in the game machine according to the operation of the game machine is provided.
The display control means
When the game machine determines that the advantageous section has started, the information display means starts displaying a specific state.
When it is determined by the specific game medium number payout determination means that the specific number of game media has been paid out during the advantageous section in the game machine, the display of the specific state in the information display means can be terminated. In a state of
When the game machine determines that the advantageous section has been completed by the advantageous section end determination means, if the display of the specific state can be terminated, the information display means displays the specific state. It is characterized by terminating.

In the gaming device according to the present invention, when a specific number of game media are paid out during a state advantageous to the player (advantageous section), the display of the specific state corresponding to the advantageous section can be terminated. When it is determined that the advantageous section has been completed, the display of the specific state is terminated if the display of the specific state can be terminated. Therefore, even if the gaming device cannot clearly recognize the end of the advantageous section in the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the display contents from being inconsistent as much as possible.

(Appendix L2)
Further, the gaming device according to the present invention is
The gaming machine has a first normal gaming state (for example, a low RT gaming state) in which the winning probability of a predetermined combination (for example, a replay combination) in which the replay is activated is low, and a second normal gaming state in which the winning probability of the predetermined combination is high. (For example, a high RT gaming state), and in the advantageous section, when the procedure of the stop operation for maintaining the second normal gaming state is notified and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the first When a signal (for example, an advantageous section signal) is output to the game device and the unit game is completed and the game medium is paid out, a second signal (for example, a medal payout signal) corresponding to the number of payouts of the game medium is output. It is output to the game device and is output to the game device.
When the first signal is input from the gaming machine, the advantageous section start determining means determines that the advantageous section has started in the gaming machine.
When the second signal corresponding to the specific number is input from the game machine, the specific game medium number payout determination means determines that the specific number of game media has been paid out.
When the number of payouts of the game medium in a predetermined period falls below a predetermined threshold value based on the second signal input from the game machine, the advantageous section end determination means is said to be said in the game machine. It is characterized in that it is determined that the advantageous section has been completed.

Further, in the gaming device according to the present invention, various determinations are made according to various signals input from the gaming machine, so that the state of the gaming machine can be recognized more appropriately.

By the way, like the above-mentioned game machine, it is good if the start and end of the state advantageous to the player can be recognized on the game device side, but when they are not recognizable on the game device side, Ingenuity is required to display the effect linked to the start and end of the advantageous state. In particular, regarding the end of the advantageous state, there are many game machines whose specifications are not recognizable on the game device side, and even when connected to a game machine having such specifications, there is a discrepancy in the displayed contents. It is considered necessary to prevent the occurrence of the above as much as possible.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and even if the gaming device cannot clearly recognize the end of a state advantageous to the player in the gaming machine, the display content is thereby displayed. To provide a game device that can prevent inconsistencies as much as possible and that the game hall can accurately recognize the possibility of a defect or fraudulent activity. The purpose.

(Appendix M1)
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming device according to the present invention
When a predetermined start condition (for example, an advantageous section start condition) is satisfied, an advantageous section advantageous to the player is started, and when a predetermined end condition (for example, an advantageous section end condition) is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated and the gaming state is established. Has a normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) and a special gaming state (for example, a BB gaming state), and in the advantageous section, the gaming state is either the normal gaming state or the special gaming state. Regardless of the above, it is a game device (for example, a game display device 1) that can be connected to a game machine (for example, a pachislot game machine 2b) that continues the advantageous section until the predetermined end condition is satisfied. hand,
Information display means for displaying various information (for example, screen units 11A to 11F) and
A display control means (for example, a control unit 100) that controls the information display means, and
An advantageous section start determination means (for example, display CPU 101) that determines whether or not the advantageous section has been started in the game machine according to the operation of the game machine.
An advantageous section end determination means (for example, display CPU 101) that determines whether or not the advantageous section has been completed in the game machine according to the operation of the game machine.
A special game state determination means (for example, display CPU 101) that determines whether or not the game machine is in the special game state according to the operation of the game machine.
When the advantageous section start determining means determines that the advantageous section has started in the gaming machine, the special section is until the advantageous section ending determining means determines that the advantageous section has ended in the gaming machine. Regardless of whether or not the game machine is determined to be in the special gaming state by the game state determining means, the game in the advantageous section that counts the number of games in the advantageous section according to the operation of the game machine. A number counting means (for example, an advantageous section counter) is provided.
In the display control means, the counting result by the game number counting means in the advantageous section corresponds to the predetermined end condition without the game machine determining that the advantageous section has been completed by the advantageous section end determining means. When the specific number of games (for example, the advantageous section counter is "1550") is reached, special information (for example, an error display) is displayed on the information display means.

The gaming device according to the present invention is special when the counting result of the number of games in the advantageous section becomes a specific number of games without determining that the advantageous state (advantageous section) for the player has been completed. Information is displayed. Therefore, even if the gaming device cannot clearly recognize the end of the advantageous section in the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the display contents from being inconsistent as much as possible, and further, a defect. It is also possible for the amusement park to accurately recognize the possibility of the occurrence or fraudulent activity.

(Appendix M2)
Further, the gaming device according to the present invention is
The gaming machine has a low probability of winning a predetermined combination (for example, a replay combination) in which a re-game is activated as the normal game state, and a high probability of winning the first normal game state (for example, a low RT gaming state) and the predetermined combination. It has a second normal gaming state (for example, a high RT gaming state), and in the advantageous section, at least the procedure of the stop operation in which the second normal gaming state is maintained is notified, and the predetermined start condition is satisfied. If this is the case, a first signal (for example, an advantageous section signal) is output to the game device, and when the unit game is completed and the game medium is paid out, a second signal (for example, a second signal corresponding to the number of paid out game media) is output. , Medal payout signal) is output to the game device.
When the first signal is input from the gaming machine, the advantageous section start determining means determines that the advantageous section has started in the gaming machine.
When the number of payouts of the game medium in a predetermined period falls below a predetermined threshold value based on the second signal input from the game machine, the advantageous section end determination means is said to be said in the game machine. It is characterized in that it is determined that the advantageous section has been completed.

Further, in the gaming device according to the present invention, various determinations are made according to various signals input from the gaming machine, so that the state of the gaming machine can be recognized more appropriately.

In recent years, in a game information display device connected to a game machine capable of operating a state (ART) advantageous to the player, in which a procedure of a stop operation advantageous to the player (stop operation order) is notified, the first in the game machine. The case where the advantageous state (“ART”) is activated and the case where the second advantageous state (“S-ART”), which is more advantageous than the first advantageous state, is activated in the game machine, are different. A device that enables an effect display has been proposed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-96100).

By the way, like the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is good if the types of states that are advantageous to the player can be recognized on the gaming device side, but if they are not recognizable on the gaming device side, the advantage. Ingenuity is required to display the effect linked to the type of state. Further, in that case, it is considered necessary to prevent an excessive control load from being generated on the gaming device side.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and even when the gaming machine has a plurality of advantageous states having different durations, the present invention has a simple configuration and is in any of the advantageous states. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming device capable of appropriately notifying information about the existence.

(Appendix N1)
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming device according to the present invention
When the first start condition (for example, advantageous section start condition A) is satisfied, the first advantageous section which is advantageous for the player is started, and when the first end condition (for example, advantageous section end condition A) is satisfied, the first advantageous section is started. When the advantageous section is terminated and the second start condition (for example, advantageous section start condition B) is satisfied, the second advantageous section that is advantageous to the player is started, and the second end condition (for example, advantageous section end condition B) is started. When is established, the second advantageous section is terminated, and in the first advantageous section and the second advantageous section, the gaming machine (for example, the pachislot gaming machine 2b) in which the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. A connectable gaming device (for example, a gaming display device 1).
Information display means for displaying various information (for example, screen units 11A to 11F) and
A display control means (for example, a control unit 100) that controls the information display means, and
Advantageous section determining means (for example, display CPU 101) for determining whether or not the gaming machine is in the first advantageous section or the second advantageous section according to the operation of the gaming machine.
When the game machine is determined to be in the first advantageous section or the second advantageous section by the advantageous section determining means, the number of games played in the advantageous section is counted according to the operation of the game machine. A means for counting the number of games played during an advantageous section (for example, an advantageous section counter) is provided.
The gaming machine has a normal gaming state, a first specific gaming state (for example, MB1 gaming state), and a second specific gaming state (for example, MB2 gaming state) as gaming states, and from the normal gaming state. When it is decided to shift to the first specific gaming state, the first start condition is satisfied, the first specific gaming state is set as the first advantageous section, and the first specific gaming state is set. When the above is completed, the first end condition is satisfied, and in the second end condition, the number of times that the second advantageous section can be played (for example, "50" times) is the number of times that the first advantageous section can be played. The first end condition or the second end condition is set to be larger than the number of times (for example, "2" times), and when at least the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the first end condition or the second end condition is satisfied. Is to be output to the gaming device until the first signal (for example, an advantageous section signal) is output.
When the first signal is input from the gaming machine, the advantageous section determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the first advantageous section or the second advantageous section.
When the information display means determines that the gaming machine is in the first advantageous section or the second advantageous section by the advantageous section determining means, the display control means has the number of games played in the advantageous section. Until the counting result by the counting means reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, "2" times) that can be played in the first advantageous section, the predetermined state is displayed and the number exceeds the specified number of times. It is characterized in that the display of a specific state is started when the case occurs.

In the gaming device according to the present invention, when there are a plurality of advantageous states (first advantageous section and second advantageous section) having different durations, the number of games in the advantageous section is relatively long. A predetermined state is displayed until a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times) is set as a playable number of times in the short first advantageous section, and when the specific number of times is exceeded, the display of the specific state is started. It has become like. Therefore, even when the gaming machine has a plurality of advantageous states having different durations, it is possible to appropriately notify the information regarding which advantageous state the game machine is in with a simple configuration.

(Appendix N2)
Further, the gaming device according to the present invention is
When the game machine is determined to be in the first advantageous section or the second advantageous section by the advantageous section determining means, the game medium in the advantageous section is acquired according to the operation of the game machine. Further equipped with a means for counting the number of acquired game media in an advantageous section (for example, a counter for the number of acquired advantageous sections) for counting the number.
When the unit game is completed and the game medium is paid out, the game machine outputs a second signal (for example, a medal payout signal) according to the number of payouts of the game medium to the game device.
The means for counting the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section counts the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section when the second signal is input from the gaming machine.
The display control means is characterized in that, when the display of the specific state is started in the information display means, the display of the counting result by the acquisition game medium number counting means in the advantageous section is started.

Further, in the gaming device according to the present invention, as the display of the specific state is started, the display of the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section is also started. As a result, not only the information regarding the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section can be displayed more appropriately, but also the display can give the player a sense of expectation and improve the interest of the game.

In recent years, by notifying the procedure of the stop operation (stop operation order) that is advantageous for the player, the game state (high RT game state) with a high probability of winning the replay combination is maintained, and the probability of establishing a small combination is also increased. Proposed a game information display device connected to a game machine capable of operating an advantageous state (ART) for an improved player, which enables an effect display linked to the start and end of the advantageous state. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-96100).

By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when it is determined to shift to a state advantageous to the player, notification of the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is started, but until the transition to the high RT gaming state is started. It will not be the most advantageous condition. That is, the timing at which the advantageous state is started and the timing at which the most advantageous state is started are different. In this case, if the number of acquired game media in the advantageous state is counted and the number of acquired game media in the advantageous state is displayed accordingly, the acquisition of the game medium in the advantageous state is displayed. The number may not be properly reported.

The present invention has been made in view of these points, and is advantageous even when the timing at which the advantageous state is started and the timing at which the most advantageous state is started in the gaming machine are different. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming device capable of appropriately notifying information on the number of acquired gaming media in a state.

(Appendix O1)
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming device according to the present invention
When a predetermined start condition (for example, an advantageous section start condition) is satisfied, an advantageous section advantageous to the player is started, and when a predetermined end condition (for example, an advantageous section end condition) is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated and the gaming state is established. A first game state (for example, a low RT game state) in which the winning probability of a predetermined combination (for example, a replay combination) in which the replay is activated is low, and a second game state (for example, a high RT game) in which the winning probability of the predetermined combination is high. State), and regardless of whether the gaming state is the first gaming state or the second gaming state, the gaming machine that continues the advantageous section until the predetermined end condition is satisfied. A game device (for example, a game display device 1) that can be connected to (for example, a pachislot game machine 2b).
Information display means for displaying various information (for example, screen units 11A to 11F) and
A display control means (for example, a control unit 100) that controls the information display means, and
Advantageous section determining means (for example, display CPU 101) for determining whether or not the gaming machine is in the advantageous section according to the operation of the gaming machine, and
A second gaming state determining means (for example, display CPU 101) that determines whether or not the gaming machine is in the second gaming state according to the operation of the gaming machine.
When the gaming machine is determined to be in the advantageous section by the advantageous section determining means, the gaming machine is not in the second gaming state by the second gaming state determining means, and the first game A means for counting the number of acquired game media in a normal advantageous section (for example, a provisional counting counter) that counts the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section according to the operation of the game machine when it is determined to be in the state. )When,
When the advantageous section determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section, the second gaming state determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the second gaming state. If so, it is provided with a special advantageous section acquisition number counting means (for example, an advantageous section acquisition number counter) for counting the acquisition number of game media in the advantageous section according to the operation of the game machine.
The display control means is a case where the gaming machine is determined to be in the advantageous section by the advantageous section determining means, and the gaming machine is in the second gaming state by the second gaming state determining means. When it is determined that, the counting result by the game medium number counting means acquired in the special advantageous section is updated based on the counting result by the game medium number counting means acquired in the normal advantageous section, and the updated result is displayed as the information. It is characterized in that it is displayed by means.

In the gaming device according to the present invention, even when the player is in an advantageous gaming state (advantageous section) and is not in a specific RT gaming state, the number of acquired game media is counted and specified in the advantageous section. When the RT game state is reached, the number of acquired game media in the advantageous section including this counting result is updated, and the updated result is displayed. Therefore, even when the timing at which the advantageous state is started and the timing at which the most advantageous state is started in the game machine are different, the information regarding the number of acquired game media in the advantageous state is appropriately notified. be able to.

(Appendix O2)
Further, the gaming device according to the present invention is
The display control means
When the advantageous section determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section and the second gaming state determining means determines that the gaming machine is not in the second gaming state, the information display means Display the predetermined state (for example, the first state),
When the advantageous section determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the advantageous section and the second gaming state determining means determines that the gaming machine is in the second gaming state, the information display means. The specific state (for example, the third state) is displayed in the above.

Further, in the gaming device according to the present invention, a predetermined state (first state) is displayed when the player is in the advantageous section and not in the specific RT game state, and the specific RT game state is displayed in the advantageous section. When it is inside, the specific state (third state) is displayed. As a result, even when the timing at which the advantageous state is started and the timing at which the most advantageous state is started in the game machine are different, the information desired by the player can be notified as appropriately as possible. it can.

1 ... Game display device, 2 ... Game machine, 2a ... Pachinko game machine, 2b ... Pachislot game machine, 3 ... Game medium rental device, 3a ... Game ball rental device, 3b ... Medal rental device, 10 ... Housing, 11A ~ 11F ... Screen unit, 110A ~ 110F ... Screen (projected part), 1100 ... Incident surface (light guide part), 1101 ... Display surface (display part), 12 ... Projector body (projecting means), 13 ... Reflector, 14 ... Operation unit, 30 ... Movable decorative sheet, 40 ... Fixed decorative sheet, 70 ... Base, 71 ... Light emitting element (LED), 72 ... Diffuse reflection unit, 73 to 75 ... Shading member, G1 ... Game device, G101 ... Base, G61a ... Opening, G61 ... Light guide plate, G61b ... Opening side end face, G60A ... LED, G61d ... Reflector, G60 ... LED substrate, G60e / G61e ... Alignment part, G101e ... Alignment member, F1 ... Game device, F1021b ... Translucent part, F1021 ... Exterior panel, F1021a ... Touch area, F1022 ... Touch sensor, F1024 ... LED array, F1023 ... Light guide plate, F10250 ... Control circuit

Claims (2)

When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, an advantageous section advantageous to the player is started, and when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated, and the game state has a normal gaming state and a special gaming state, and the advantageous section In the game, regardless of whether the game state is the normal game state or the special game state, the game can be connected to a game machine that continues the advantageous section until the predetermined end condition is satisfied. It ’s a device,
Information display means for displaying various information and
A display control means for controlling the information display means and
An advantageous section start determining means for determining whether or not the advantageous section has been started in the gaming machine according to the operation of the gaming machine, and
An advantageous section end determination means for determining whether or not the advantageous section has been completed in the game machine according to the operation of the game machine, and
A special gaming state determining means for determining whether or not the gaming machine is in the special gaming state according to the operation of the gaming machine, and
When the advantageous section start determining means determines that the advantageous section has started in the gaming machine, the special section is until the advantageous section ending determining means determines that the advantageous section has ended in the gaming machine. Regardless of whether or not the game machine is determined to be in the special gaming state by the game state determining means, the game in the advantageous section that counts the number of games in the advantageous section according to the operation of the game machine. Equipped with a number counting means,
In the display control means, the counting result by the game number counting means in the advantageous section corresponds to the predetermined end condition without the game machine determining that the advantageous section has been completed by the advantageous section end determining means. A gaming device characterized in that special information is displayed on the information display means when the specified number of games is reached. The gaming machine has a first normal gaming state in which the winning probability of a predetermined combination in which the re-game is activated as the normal gaming state is low and a second normal gaming state in which the winning probability of the predetermined combination is high, and in the advantageous section. Is notified of at least the procedure of the stop operation in which the second normal game state is maintained, and when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the first signal is output to the game device, the unit game is completed, and the game is played. When the medium is paid out, a second signal corresponding to the number of payouts of the game medium is output to the game device.
When the first signal is input from the gaming machine, the advantageous section start determining means determines that the advantageous section has started in the gaming machine.
When the number of payouts of the game medium in a predetermined period falls below a predetermined threshold value based on the second signal input from the game machine, the advantageous section end determination means is said to be said in the game machine. The gaming device according to claim 1, wherein it is determined that the advantageous section has been completed.

Images